Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 209

OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

V100R007

Planning Guidelines

Issue 05
Date 2009-09-15
Part Number 31400819

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any
assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2009. All rights reserved.


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines Contents

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................1


1 Overview of Planning...............................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Planning Items.................................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 References.......................................................................................................................................................1-3

2 Planning Network Layers.........................................................................................................2-1


2.1 Basic Principles...............................................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Network Layers for the OptiX OSN Equipment.............................................................................................2-2
2.3 Interconnection to Other OptiX Equipment....................................................................................................2-3
2.3.1 Interconnection Abilities........................................................................................................................2-3
2.3.2 Interconnection to the OptiX OSN Series Equipment...........................................................................2-4
2.3.3 Interconnection to the OptiX DWDM Series Equipment......................................................................2-5
2.3.4 Interconnection to the OptiX Metro Series Equipment..........................................................................2-7
2.4 Network Management Abilities of the T2000 and the Computation of the Abilities.....................................2-7

3 Planning Networking................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Basic Principles...............................................................................................................................................3-2
3.2 NE Types Supported by the Equipment..........................................................................................................3-2
3.2.1 TM..........................................................................................................................................................3-3
3.2.2 ADM.......................................................................................................................................................3-3
3.2.3 MADM...................................................................................................................................................3-4
3.2.4 REG........................................................................................................................................................3-5
3.3 Networking Modes Supported by the Equipment...........................................................................................3-7

4 Planning Network Protection..................................................................................................4-1


4.1 Basic Principles...............................................................................................................................................4-3
4.2 Network Protection Schemes Supported by the Equipment...........................................................................4-3
4.3 Planning the MSP Ring...................................................................................................................................4-4
4.3.1 Capabilities of Supporting the MSP Ring..............................................................................................4-4
4.3.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................4-5
4.4 Planning the SNCP..........................................................................................................................................4-6
4.4.1 Capabilities of Supporting the SNCP.....................................................................................................4-6
4.4.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................4-6
4.5 Planning the 1+1 Linear MSP.........................................................................................................................4-7
4.5.1 Capabilities of Supporting the 1+1 Linear MSP....................................................................................4-7

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Contents Planning Guidelines

4.5.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................4-7


4.6 Planning the 1:N Linear MSP.........................................................................................................................4-8
4.6.1 Capabilities of Supporting the 1:N Linear MSP....................................................................................4-8
4.6.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................4-8
4.7 Planning the DNI Protection...........................................................................................................................4-9
4.7.1 Capabilities of Supporting the DNI Protection......................................................................................4-9
4.7.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................4-9
4.8 Planning the Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection........................................................................................4-9
4.8.1 Capabilities of Supporting the Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection...................................................4-9
4.8.2 Planning Principles...............................................................................................................................4-10
4.9 Planning the Optical-Path-Shared MSP........................................................................................................4-10
4.9.1 Capabilities of Supporting the Optical-Path-Shared MSP...................................................................4-10
4.9.2 Planning Principles...............................................................................................................................4-10
4.10 Planning the Ethernet RPR Protection........................................................................................................4-11
4.10.1 Capabilities of Supporting the Ethernet RPR Protection...................................................................4-11
4.10.2 Planning Principles.............................................................................................................................4-12
4.11 Planning the VP-Ring and VC-Ring Protection Schemes for the ATM Service........................................4-12
4.11.1 Capabilities of Supporting the VP-Ring and VC-Ring Protection Schemes for the ATM Service...4-12
4.11.2 Planning Principles.............................................................................................................................4-13
4.11.3 Planning Examples.............................................................................................................................4-13

5 Planning the DCN......................................................................................................................5-1


5.1 DCN Schemes Supported by the Equipment..................................................................................................5-2
5.2 Basic Principles...............................................................................................................................................5-3
5.3 Planning NE IDs..............................................................................................................................................5-3
5.4 Planning the HWECC.....................................................................................................................................5-4
5.4.1 Capabilities of Supporting the HWECC................................................................................................5-4
5.4.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................5-4
5.5 Planning the IP over DCC...............................................................................................................................5-5
5.5.1 Capabilities of Supporting the IP over DCC..........................................................................................5-5
5.5.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................5-6
5.6 Planning the OSI over DCC............................................................................................................................5-6
5.6.1 Capabilities of Supporting the OSI over DCC.......................................................................................5-7
5.6.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................5-7
5.6.3 Planning Cases.......................................................................................................................................5-9

6 Planning Services.......................................................................................................................6-1
6.1 Basic Planning Principles................................................................................................................................6-3
6.2 Maximum Service Access Capacity................................................................................................................6-3
6.2.1 Service Access Capacity........................................................................................................................6-3
6.2.2 Slot Access Capacity..............................................................................................................................6-4
6.2.3 Cross-Connect Capacity.........................................................................................................................6-5
6.3 Planning SDH Services...................................................................................................................................6-6
6.3.1 Capability of Supporting SDH Services.................................................................................................6-6

ii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines Contents

6.3.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................6-8


6.4 Planning Long-Haul Optical Transmission.....................................................................................................6-9
6.4.1 Capability of Supporting Long-Haul Optical Transmission..................................................................6-9
6.4.2 Planning Principles...............................................................................................................................6-10
6.5 Planning PDH Services.................................................................................................................................6-11
6.5.1 Capability of Supporting PDH Services...............................................................................................6-11
6.5.2 Planning Principles...............................................................................................................................6-13
6.6 Planning Ethernet Services............................................................................................................................6-13
6.6.1 Capability of Supporting Ethernet Services.........................................................................................6-13
6.6.2 Planning Principles...............................................................................................................................6-20
6.6.3 Planning Transparently Transmitted EPL Services.............................................................................6-21
6.6.4 Planning Port-Shared EPL Services.....................................................................................................6-23
6.6.5 Planning VCTRUNK-Shared EPL Services........................................................................................6-24
6.6.6 Planning VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services.....................................................................................6-26
6.6.7 Planning EVPL Services (Transmit Scheme)......................................................................................6-28
6.6.8 Planning EPLAN Services...................................................................................................................6-29
6.6.9 Planning EVPLAN Services................................................................................................................6-31
6.7 Planning RPR Services..................................................................................................................................6-33
6.7.1 Capability of the OptiX OSN 2500 of Supporting RPR Services........................................................6-33
6.7.2 Planning Principles...............................................................................................................................6-35
6.7.3 Planning EVPL Services for RPR Boards............................................................................................6-36
6.7.4 Planning EVPLAN Services for RPR Boards......................................................................................6-38
6.8 Planning ATM and IMA Services.................................................................................................................6-41
6.8.1 Capability of Supporting the ATM and IMA Services........................................................................6-42
6.8.2 Planning Principles...............................................................................................................................6-43
6.8.3 Planning Transparently Transmitted ATM Services............................................................................6-44
6.8.4 Planning Multicast ATM Services.......................................................................................................6-46
6.8.5 Planning Statistically Multiplexed ATM Services...............................................................................6-48
6.8.6 Planning IMA Services........................................................................................................................6-51
6.9 Planning SAN and Video Services................................................................................................................6-54
6.9.1 Capability of Supporting SAN and Video Services.............................................................................6-54
6.9.2 Planning Principles...............................................................................................................................6-55
6.9.3 Planning Transparently Transmitted SAN Services.............................................................................6-55
6.10 Planning DDN Services..............................................................................................................................6-56
6.10.1 Capability of Supporting DDN Services............................................................................................6-57
6.10.2 Plannig Principles...............................................................................................................................6-57
6.10.3 Planning N x 64 kbit/s Services (Point-to-Point Transmission)........................................................6-58
6.10.4 Planning Framed E1 Services (Point-to-Point Transmission)............................................................6-59
6.10.5 Planning N x 64 kbit/s and Framed E1 Services (Hybrid Transmission)..........................................6-60
6.10.6 Planning Converged Framed E1 Services..........................................................................................6-61
6.10.7 Planning Converged N x 64 kbit/s Services.......................................................................................6-63
6.11 Planning WDM Services.............................................................................................................................6-64

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Contents Planning Guidelines

6.11.1 Capability of Supporting WDM Services..........................................................................................6-64


6.11.2 Planning Principles.............................................................................................................................6-65

7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection...................................................................................7-1


7.1 Basic Principles...............................................................................................................................................7-3
7.2 Capabilities of Supporting Equipment-Level Protection................................................................................7-3
7.3 Planning the TPS Protection for the E1/T1 Service Boards............................................................................7-4
7.3.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the E1/T1 Service Boards.......................................7-4
7.3.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................7-5
7.3.3 Planning Cases....................................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.4 Planning the TPS Protection for the E3/T3 Service Boards............................................................................7-6
7.4.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the E3/T3 Service Boards.......................................7-6
7.4.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................7-6
7.4.3 Planning Cases....................................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.5 Planning the TPS Protection for the E4 Service Boards.................................................................................7-8
7.5.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the E4 Service Boards............................................7-8
7.5.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................7-8
7.5.3 Planning Cases....................................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.6 Planning the TPS Protection for the STM-1 Electrical Interface Service Boards...........................................7-9
7.6.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the STM-1 Electrical Interface Service Boards......7-9
7.6.2 Planning Principles...............................................................................................................................7-10
7.6.3 Planning Cases.....................................................................................................................................7-10
7.7 Planning the TPS Protection for the Ethernet Boards...................................................................................7-10
7.7.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the Ethernet Boards..............................................7-11
7.7.2 Planning Principles...............................................................................................................................7-11
7.7.3 Planning Cases.....................................................................................................................................7-11
7.8 Planning the BPS/PPS Protection for the Ethernet Boards...........................................................................7-12
7.8.1 Capabilities of Supporting the BPS/PPS Protection for the Ethernet Boards......................................7-12
7.8.2 Planning Principles...............................................................................................................................7-12
7.8.3 Planning Cases.....................................................................................................................................7-13
7.9 Planning the 1+1 Protection for the ATM Boards........................................................................................7-13
7.9.1 Capabilities of Supporting the 1+1 Protection for the ATM Boards...................................................7-13
7.9.2 Planning Principles...............................................................................................................................7-14
7.9.3 Planning Cases.....................................................................................................................................7-14
7.10 Planning the TPS Protection for the DDN Service.....................................................................................7-14
7.10.1 Planning the TPS Protection for the DDN Service ...........................................................................7-15
7.10.2 Planning Principles.............................................................................................................................7-15
7.10.3 Planning Cases...................................................................................................................................7-15
7.11 Planning the TPS Protection for the Hybrid Service...................................................................................7-16
7.11.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the Hybrid Service..............................................7-16
7.11.2 Planning Principles.............................................................................................................................7-16
7.11.3 Planning Cases...................................................................................................................................7-16

8 Planning Clocks..........................................................................................................................8-1

iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines Contents

8.1 Basic Principles...............................................................................................................................................8-2


8.2 Capabilities of Supporting Clocks...................................................................................................................8-2
8.3 Planning Examples..........................................................................................................................................8-3

9 Planning Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces......................................................................9-1


9.1 Planning Orderwire Phone Interfaces..............................................................................................................9-2
9.1.1 Capability of Supporting Orderwire Phone Interfaces...........................................................................9-2
9.1.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................9-2
9.1.3 Planning Example..................................................................................................................................9-3
9.2 Planning Broadcast Data Interfaces S1–S4.....................................................................................................9-3
9.2.1 Capability of Supporting Broadcast Data Interfaces..............................................................................9-3
9.2.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................9-4
9.2.3 Planning Example..................................................................................................................................9-4
9.3 Planning External Alarm Interfaces................................................................................................................9-5
9.3.1 Capability of Supporting External Alarm Interfaces..............................................................................9-6
9.3.2 Planning Principles.................................................................................................................................9-6

10 Planning Hardware................................................................................................................10-1
10.1 Planning the Cabinet...................................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.1 Cabinet...............................................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.2 Planning Principles.............................................................................................................................10-4
10.2 Planning Slots for Boards............................................................................................................................10-4
10.2.1 Slot Allocation....................................................................................................................................10-5
10.2.2 Planning Principles...........................................................................................................................10-14
10.3 Planning Interface Boards.........................................................................................................................10-16
10.3.1 Planning Interface Boards................................................................................................................10-16
10.3.2 Planning Principles...........................................................................................................................10-24

11 Planning Environment for Operation................................................................................11-1


11.1 Power Consumption of the Equipment.......................................................................................................11-2
11.2 Environment for Operation.........................................................................................................................11-2
11.3 Planning Principles......................................................................................................................................11-4

12 Overview of Network Optimization..................................................................................12-1


12.1 Purpose of Network Optimization...............................................................................................................12-2
12.2 Principles for Optimizing the Network.......................................................................................................12-2
12.3 Process for Optimizing a Network..............................................................................................................12-2

A Glossary.....................................................................................................................................A-1
B Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................................B-1

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines Figures

Figures

Figure 2-1 Grooming ability of the OptiX OSN 2500.........................................................................................2-2


Figure 2-2 Hybrid networking of the OptiX OSN 2500 and other equipment.....................................................2-4
Figure 2-3 Hybrid networking of the OptiX OSN 2500 and other OSN series equipment..................................2-5
Figure 2-4 Interconnection of the OptiX OSN 2500 to the OptiX WDM equipment through SDH interfaces
...............................................................................................................................................................................2-6
Figure 2-5 Interconnection of the OptiX OSN 2500 to the OptiX WDM equipment through GE interfaces
...............................................................................................................................................................................2-6
Figure 3-1 Hardware configuration when the OptiX OSN 2500 serves as an STM-16 TM NE.........................3-3
Figure 3-2 Hardware configuration when the OptiX OSN 2500 serves as an STM-16 ADM NE......................3-4
Figure 3-3 Hardware configuration when the OptiX OSN 2500 serves as an STM-16 and STM-4 MADM NE
...............................................................................................................................................................................3-5
Figure 3-4 Hybrid application of the ADM and REG supported by the OptiX OSN 2500.................................3-6
Figure 3-5 Hardware configuration when the OptiX OSN 2500 serves as an STM-4 ADM and an STM-16 REG
...............................................................................................................................................................................3-7
Figure 4-1 Two low-rate line units sharing the same high-rate line unit...........................................................4-10
Figure 4-2 Two line units with the same rate sharing the same line unit...........................................................4-11
Figure 4-3 VP-Ring protection for the ATM services.......................................................................................4-14
Figure 5-1 Planning of the DCN network in the OSI over DCC mode................................................................5-9
Figure 6-1 Access capacity of each slot before division of the three slots...........................................................6-5
Figure 6-2 Access capacity of each slot after division of the three slots.............................................................6-5
Figure 6-3 Networking diagram for transparently transmitted EPL services.....................................................6-22
Figure 6-4 Networking diagram for port-shared EPL services..........................................................................6-23
Figure 6-5 Application scheme for port-shared EPL services............................................................................6-24
Figure 6-6 Networking diagram for the VCTRUNK-shared EPL services.......................................................6-25
Figure 6-7 Networking diagram for VCTRUNK-shared EPL services.............................................................6-25
Figure 6-8 Networking diagram for the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services.....................................................6-27
Figure 6-9 Application scheme for the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services......................................................6-27
Figure 6-10 Networking diagram for EVPL services (Transmit scheme).........................................................6-28
Figure 6-11 Networking diagram for the EPLAN service.................................................................................6-30
Figure 6-12 Networking diagram for the EVPLAN service..............................................................................6-32
Figure 6-13 Networking diagram for the EVPL services on an RPR................................................................6-37
Figure 6-14 Networking diagram for EVPLAN services on an RPR................................................................6-39
Figure 6-15 Networking diagram for EVPLAN services on an RPR................................................................6-40
Figure 6-16 Figure 6-19 Networking diagram for transparent transmission of ATM services..........................6-44

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Figures Planning Guidelines

Figure 6-17 Figure 6-20 Networking diagram for the multicast ATM services................................................6-46
Figure 6-18 Networking diagram for the statistically multiplexed ATM services............................................6-49
Figure 6-19 Networking diagram for the IMA services.....................................................................................6-52
Figure 6-20 Networking diagram for transparently transmitting SAN services................................................6-55
Figure 6-21 Networking diagram for the N x 64 kbit/s service (point-to-point transmission)..........................6-58
Figure 6-22 Networking diagram for the framed E1 service (point-to-point transmission)..............................6-59
Figure 6-23 Networking diagram for the framed E1 and N x 64 kbit/s services (hybrid transmission)............6-60
Figure 6-24 Networking diagram for the converged framed E1 service............................................................6-62
Figure 6-25 Networking diagram for the converged N x 64 kbit/s services......................................................6-63
Figure 7-1 TPS configuration for the E1/T1 service before the division of slots................................................7-5
Figure 7-2 TPS configuration for the E1 service after the division of slots.........................................................7-6
Figure 7-3 Configuration of the TPS protection for the E3/T3 service (1) .........................................................7-7
Figure 7-4 Configuration of the TPS protection for the E3/T3 service (2) .........................................................7-8
Figure 7-5 TPS configuration for the E4 service..................................................................................................7-9
Figure 7-6 TPS configuration for the STM-1 electrical interface service boards..............................................7-10
Figure 7-7 TPS configuration for the Ethernet boards.......................................................................................7-11
Figure 7-8 Configuration of the BPS and PPS protection schemes for the EMS4 and EGS4 boards...............7-13
Figure 7-9 Configuration of the 1+1 protection for the ATM boards................................................................7-14
Figure 7-10 TPS configuration for the DDN service.........................................................................................7-15
Figure 7-11 TPS configuration for the hybrid service .......................................................................................7-17
Figure 8-1 Configuration of clocks in the chain network.....................................................................................8-3
Figure 8-2 Configuration of clocks in the tangent rings network........................................................................8-4
Figure 8-3 Configuration of clocks in the intersecting rings network..................................................................8-4
Figure 9-1 Planning the orderwire phone interfaces............................................................................................9-3
Figure 9-2 Application of the broadcast data interfaces.......................................................................................9-5
Figure 10-1 Appearance of the ETSI cabinet.....................................................................................................10-3
Figure 10-2 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack (before the division of slots)....................................10-5
Figure 10-3 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack (before the division of slots)............................10-5
Figure 10-4 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack (after the division of slots).......................................10-6
Figure 10-5 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack (after the division of slots)...............................10-6

viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines Tables

Tables

Table 1-1 Planning items of the OptiX OSN 2500...............................................................................................1-2


Table 2-1 List of management ability coefficients on different hardware platforms...........................................2-8
Table 3-1 Boards that support the REG function.................................................................................................3-6
Table 3-2 Optical interface types that support the REG function........................................................................ 3-6
Table 3-3 Networking modes and topologies supported by the OptiX OSN 2500..............................................3-7
Table 4-1 Network protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 2500....................................................... 4-4
Table 4-2 Capability of supporting the MSP rings of the OptiX OSN 2500........................................................4-5
Table 4-3 OptiX OSN 2500 paired slots.............................................................................................................. 4-5
Table 4-4 Requirements for the ATM services at each node.............................................................................4-14
Table 4-5 ATM service routes in the VP-Ring protection mode.......................................................................4-15
Table 5-1 DCC resource allocation of the OptiX OSN 2500...............................................................................5-2
Table 6-1 Maximum service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500................................................................6-4
Table 6-2 Cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500................................................................................. 6-6
Table 6-3 SDH boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features......................................................................6-6
Table 6-4 Optical booster amplifier units for the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features........................................6-9
Table 6-5 Dispersion compensation units for the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features.....................................6-10
Table 6-6 PDH boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features....................................................................6-11
Table 6-7 Features of the N1EFS4, N2EFS4, N1EFS0, N2EFS0 and N4EFS0 boards.....................................6-13
Table 6-8 Features of the N1EGS2 and N2EGS2 boards...................................................................................6-16
Table 6-9 Features of the N1EGT2, N1EFT8, N1EFT8A and R1EFT4 boards................................................6-17
Table 6-10 Features of the EMS4 and EGS4 boards..........................................................................................6-18
Table 6-11 Service routes for the transparently transmitted EPL services.........................................................6-22
Table 6-12 Service routes for the port-shared EPL services..............................................................................6-24
Table 6-13 Routes for the VCTRUNK-shared EPL services.............................................................................6-26
Table 6-14 Routes for the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services..........................................................................6-28
Table 6-15 Service routes for the EVPL services (Transit scheme)...................................................................6-29
Table 6-16 Routes for the EPLAN service.........................................................................................................6-31
Table 6-17 Routes for the EVPLAN service......................................................................................................6-33
Table 6-18 Ethernet RPR boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features....................................................6-33
Table 6-19 Routes for the EVPL services of the RPR boards............................................................................6-38
Table 6-20 Routes of the EVPLAN services for the RPR boards......................................................................6-41
Table 6-21 Features of the ADL4 and ADQ1....................................................................................................6-42
Table 6-22 Features of the IDL4 and IDQ1.......................................................................................................6-42

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Tables Planning Guidelines

Table 6-23 Routes for transparently transmitted ATM services........................................................................6-45


Table 6-24 Routes for multicast ATM services..................................................................................................6-47
Table 6-25 Requirements for statistically multiplexing ATM services.............................................................6-48
Table 6-26 Routes for the statistically multiplexed ATM services....................................................................6-50
Table 6-27 Requirements for IMA services among the nodes...........................................................................6-51
Table 6-28 IMA service routes...........................................................................................................................6-53
Table 6-29 Services supported by the N1MST4 and their rates.........................................................................6-55
Table 6-30 Routes for transparently transmitted SAN services.........................................................................6-56
Table 6-31 Features of the N1DX1 (N1DM12) and N1DXA............................................................................6-57
Table 6-32 Routes for the N x 64 kbit/s service (point-to-point transmission)..................................................6-59
Table 6-33 Routes for the framed E1 service (point-to-point transmission)......................................................6-60
Table 6-34 Routes for the 4 x 64 kbit/s and the framed E1 service (hybrid transmission)................................6-61
Table 6-35 Routes for the converted framed E1 services...................................................................................6-62
Table 6-36 Routes for the converged N x 64 kbit/s services..............................................................................6-64
Table 7-1 Capabilities of supporting equipment-level protection........................................................................7-3
Table 10-1 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets.................................................................................10-3
Table 10-2 Technical specifications of the 19-inch standard cabinets...............................................................10-4
Table 10-3 Mapping relation between slots for interface boards and slots for processing boards for the OptiX OSN
2500.....................................................................................................................................................................10-7
Table 10-4 Boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 2500.....................................................................10-7
Table 10-5 Sequence for planning slots for boards..........................................................................................10-14
Table 10-6 Interfaces of SDH processing boards.............................................................................................10-16
Table 10-7 Interfaces of PDH processing boards.............................................................................................10-18
Table 10-8 Interfaces of data processing boards..............................................................................................10-20
Table 10-9 Interfaces of DDN processing boards............................................................................................10-22
Table 10-10 Interfaces of WDM processing boards.........................................................................................10-22
Table 10-11 Interfaces of the optical power booster amplifier and dispersion compensation units................10-23
Table 10-12 Interfaces of auxiliary boards.......................................................................................................10-23
Table 10-13 Principles for planning STM-16 optical interfaces......................................................................10-24
Table 10-14 Principles for Planning STM-4 Optical Interfaces.......................................................................10-25
Table 10-15 Principles for Planning STM-1 Optical Interfaces.......................................................................10-26
Table 11-1 Power supply specifications.............................................................................................................11-2
Table 11-2 Requirements for temperature and humidity....................................................................................11-2
Table 11-3 Other climate requirements..............................................................................................................11-3
Table 11-4 Requirements for the density of the mechanical active substance...................................................11-3
Table 11-5 Density requirements for chemical active substances during operation..........................................11-3
Table 11-6 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation.....................................................................11-4

x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines About This Document

About This Document

Purpose
This document describes the OptiX OSN 2500 in terms of the following aspects:

l Position in a network
l Networking ability
l Service capability
l Capability of supporting protection schemes
l Capability of supporting the clock and orderwire
l Planning principles
l Process for network optimization

This document serves as a guide to plan the OptiX OSN 2500.

Related Versions
This document is organized as follows.

Product Name Version

OptiX OSN 2500 V100R007

Intended Audience
The intended audience of this document is network planning engineer.

Organization
This document consists of eight chapters and is organized as follows.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
About This Document Planning Guidelines

Chapter Description

1 Overview of Planning This chapter describes the planning items and references for
the planning of the OpiX OSN 2500.

2 Planning Network Layers This chapter describes the network layer for the OptiX OSN
2500, principles for planning network layers, ability of the
OptiX OSN 2500 to interconnect to other OptiX equipment,
and ability of the T2000 to manage the OptiX OSN 2500.

3 Planning Networking This chapter describes the principles for planning


networking, and the NE types and networking modes
supported by the OptiX OSN 2500.

4 Planning Network This chapter describes the basic principles for planning
Protection network protection schemes and the network protection
schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 2500.

5 Planning the DCN This chapter describes the HWECC, IP over DCC and OSI
over DCC protocols supported by the OptiX OSN 2500, and
the principles for planning the DCN.

6 Planning Services This chapter describes the basic principles for planning
services, the service access capability, and the planning of
services.

7 Planning Equipment-Level This chapter describes the equipment-level protection


Protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 2500 and the
principles for planning equipment-level protection
schemes.

8 Planning Clocks This chapter describes the basic principles for planning
clocks, and the abilities of the OptiX OSN 2500 to process
clocks and to protect clocks.

9 Planning Orderwire and This chapter describes the capabilities of the OptiX OSN
Auxiliary Interfaces 2500 of supporting the orderwire phone, S1–S4 data
interfaces and alarm interfaces. This chapter also describes
the principles for planning orderwire and auxiliary
interfaces.

10 Planning Hardware This chapter describes the principles for planning the
cabinet, slots and interfaces for the OptiX OSN 2500.

11 Planning Environment for This chapter describes the principles for planning the
Operation operation environment, and the power consumption and
environment requirements for operation.

12 Overview of Network This chapter describes the purposes, principles and brief
Optimization process for optimizing a network.

A Glossary This appendix lists the terms used in this document.

B Acronyms and The appendix lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in
Abbreviations this document.

2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines About This Document

Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not


avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which,


if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
WARNING

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not


avoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, and
CAUTION
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
your time.

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or


supplement important points of the main text.

General Conventions
Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For
example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.


Courier New Terminal display is in Courier New.

Command Conventions
Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italic.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are


optional.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
About This Document Planning Guidelines

Convention Description

{ x | y | ... } Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. One is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets


and separated by vertical bars. One or none is selected.

{ x | y | ... } * Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. A minimum of one or a maximum of all can
be selected.

GUI Conventions
Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in
boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For
example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operation
Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the
three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys
should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operation
Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without
moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain
position.

4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines About This Document

Update History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version
contains all updates made to previous versions.

Updates in Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Based on Product Version V100R007


This document is the fifth release for the V100R007 product version. The updated contents are
as follows:

Power Consumption of the Equipment: The max. power consumption is fixed.

Planning Interface Boards: The connectors of the PDH processing boards and auxiliary boards
are fixed.

Updates in Issue 04 (2008-05-31) Based on Product Version V100R007


This document is the fourth release for the V100R007 product version. The updated contents
are as follows:

Several bugs in this document of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 03 (2007-12-15) Based on Product Version V100R007


l Related information on the N3EGS4 is added in section 6.6 "Planning Ethernet Services",
section 7.2 "Capabilities of Supporting Equipment-Level Protection", section 7.8 "Planning
BPS/PPS Protection for the Ethernet Boards" and section 10.2 "Planning Slots for Boards."
l Information on the ASON clock function is added in section 8.2 "Capabilities of Supporting
Clocks."
l In section 10.2.2 "Planning Principles", information on the sequence of planning slots for
boards is rectified.

Updates in Issue 02 (2007-09-10) Based on Product Version V100R007


This document of the V100R007 version is of the second release. Compared with issue 01, issue
02 has the following revised or optimized content.

l In section 11.1 "Power Consumption of the Equipment", the Max. power consumption and
current are rectified.
l The mapping relation between boards and slots is optimized in section 10.2.1 "Slot
Allocation".

Updates in Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Based on Product Version V100R007


This document of the V100R007 version is of the first release. Compared with the V100R006,
this version has the following new or optimized content:
l The document structure is optimized.
l The description of how to plan the SNCTP is added.
l Section 2.4 is added to describe the network management abilities of the T2000 and the
computation of the abilities.
l Chapter 5 is added to describe how to plan the DCN.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
About This Document Planning Guidelines

l Chapter 10 is added to describe how to plan hardware.


l Chapter 11 is added to describe how to plan environment for operation.
l Chapter 12 is added to describe the overview of network optimization.

Updates in Issue 03 (2007-03-30) Based on Product Version V100R006


The bug about the transparent transmission of the NM information through section overheads
is fixed.

Updates in Issue 02 (2007-01-10) Based on Product Version V100R006


Fix several bugs in the manual of the previous version.

Updates in Issue 01 (2006-09-20) Based on Product Version V100R006


This document of the V100R006 version is of the first release.

Updates in Issue 03 (2006-11-20) Based on Product Version V100R005


With update naming of version, fix several bugs in the manual of the previous version.

Updates in Issue 02 (2006-06-20) Based on Product Version V100R005


The former manual version is T2-040237-20060620-C-1.51.
The updated contents are as follows.
Several bugs in this document of the previous version are fixed.

Updates in Issue 01 (2006-03-20) Based on Product Version V100R005


The former manual version is T2-040237-20060320-C-1.51.
This document of the V100R005 version is of the first release.

6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 1 Overview of Planning

1 Overview of Planning

About This Chapter

When planning the network, consider the network layers, networking modes, and network
protection schemes, and refer to relevant documents.

1.1 Planning Items


When planning the OptiX OSN 2500, plan the network layers, services, protection schemes, and
clocks.
1.2 References
When planning the OptiX OSN 2500, refer to the documents that involve the product features
of the OptiX OSN 2500.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
1 Overview of Planning Planning Guidelines

1.1 Planning Items


When planning the OptiX OSN 2500, plan the network layers, services, protection schemes, and
clocks.
Table 1-1 lists the planning items of the OptiX OSN 2500.

Table 1-1 Planning items of the OptiX OSN 2500


Item Chapter Description

Planning 2 Planning Network Layers This chapter describes the network layers
network for the OptiX OSN 2500, principles for
layers planning network layers, ability of the
OptiX OSN 2500 to interconnect to other
OptiX equipment, and ability of the
T2000 to manage the OptiX OSN 2500.

Planning 3 Planning Networking This chapter describes the principles for


networking planning networking, and the NE types
and networking modes supported by the
OptiX OSN 2500.

Planning 4 Planning Network Protection This chapter describes the basic


network principles for planning network
protection protection schemes and the network
schemes protection schemes supported by the
OptiX OSN 2500.

Planning the 5 Planning the DCN This chapter describes the HWECC, IP
DCN over DCC and OSI over DCC protocols
network supported by the OptiX OSN 2500, and
the principles for planning the DCN.

Planning 6 Planning Services This chapter describes the basic


services principles for planning services, the
service access capability, and the
planning of services.

Planning 7 Planning Equipment-Level This chapter describes the equipment-


equipment- Protection level protection supported by the OptiX
level OSN 2500 and the principles for planning
proteciton equipment-level protection.

Planning 8 Planning Clocks This chapter describes the basic


clocks principles for planning clocks, and the
abilities of the OptiX OSN 2500 to
process clocks and to protect clocks.

1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 1 Overview of Planning

Item Chapter Description

Planning 9 Planning Orderwire and This chapter describes the capabilities of


orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces the OptiX OSN 2500 of supporting the
auxiliary orderwire phone, S1–S4 data interfaces
interfaces and alarm interfaces. This chapter also
describes the principles for planning
orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.

Planning 10 Planning Hardware This chapter describes the principles for


hardware planning the cabinet, slots and interfaces
for the OptiX OSN 2500.

Planning 11 Planning Environment for This chapter describes the principles for
environment Operation planning the operation environment, and
for operation the power consumption and environment
requirements for operation.

NOTE

During the planning of a transmission network, you should first collect and analyze service requirements,
and then analyze the existing network information and determine the network capacity. After that, you
should plan the T2000. The operations mentioned in this note are not described in this document.

1.2 References
When planning the OptiX OSN 2500, refer to the documents that involve the product features
of the OptiX OSN 2500.
References:
l OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Hardware Description
l OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 2 Planning Network Layers

2 Planning Network Layers

About This Chapter

When planning the network layers, follow the basic principles, and consider the network layers
for the equipment, interconnection to other OptiX equipment, and network management abilities
of the T2000.

2.1 Basic Principles


When planning the layers of the transmission network, consider the necessity to layer the
network, rationality of layering the network, and functions of each layer.
2.2 Network Layers for the OptiX OSN Equipment
The OptiX OSN 2500 is an intelligent optical switching platform, which mainly serves as a
service grooming node at the backbone layer of the metropolitan area network (MAN). Thus, it
completes the grooming and transmission of services of multiple types and different
granularities.
2.3 Interconnection to Other OptiX Equipment
OptiX OSN 2500 can interconnect to other Huawei OptiX equipment to provide an integrated
transmission network solution.
2.4 Network Management Abilities of the T2000 and the Computation of the Abilities
The T2000 performs management and maintenance operations on the OptiX OSN 2500. During
the network planning, consider the management abilities of the T2000 to select the hardware
and management domains of the T2000.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
2 Planning Network Layers Planning Guidelines

2.1 Basic Principles


When planning the layers of the transmission network, consider the necessity to layer the
network, rationality of layering the network, and functions of each layer.
l Necessity to layer the network
l Rationality of layering the network
l Functions of each layer, such as grooming, accessing and convergence
l Interworking with data and service networks
l Coverage of networks and services
l Future evolution of networks and services
l Rationality of the capacity of each layer
l Traffic equilibrium at each station

2.2 Network Layers for the OptiX OSN Equipment


The OptiX OSN 2500 is an intelligent optical switching platform, which mainly serves as a
service grooming node at the backbone layer of the metropolitan area network (MAN). Thus, it
completes the grooming and transmission of services of multiple types and different
granularities.
l At the convergence and access layer, the OptiX OSN 2500 can form a ring, chain, HUB,
ring with chain, intersecting rings, tangent rings, DNI or mesh network at the STM-16,
STM-4, or STM-1 level.
l The maximum higher order cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 is 20 Gbit/s,
and the maximum lower order cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s. Thus, at the access or
convergence layer, the OptiX OSN 2500 can groom services at different rates. Figure
2-1 shows the grooming ability of the OptiX OSN 2500.

Figure 2-1 Grooming ability of the OptiX OSN 2500

STM-64
Backbone
Service layer
OptiX OSN
OptiX OSN 3500 Grooming 3500
OptiX OSN 2500
OptiX OSN Convergence
STM-16 ring STM-16
2500 layer
ring

STM-4 OptiX OSN OptiX OSN 2500


STM-1
ring 2500 ring STM-4
STM-1 ring
ring
Access
Access Access layer
Access OptiX OSN
OptiX OSN Access OptiX OSN
OptiX OSN 2500
2500 2500
2500
Service:
MSTP SDH
PDH:E1/T1/E3/T3/E4
SDH:STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/STM-64
Ethernet:10M/100M/1000M
ATM:155M/622M
SAN:FC/FICON/ESCON/DVB

2-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 2 Planning Network Layers

2.3 Interconnection to Other OptiX Equipment


OptiX OSN 2500 can interconnect to other Huawei OptiX equipment to provide an integrated
transmission network solution.
2.3.1 Interconnection Abilities
The OptiX OSN 2500 can interconnect to the Huawei OptiX OSN, DWDM and Metro series
equipment to provide an integrated transmission network solution.
2.3.2 Interconnection to the OptiX OSN Series Equipment
OptiX OSN 2500 is connected to other OptiX OSN series equipment to construct a hybrid
network, which can complete an integrated intelligent solution from the backbone layer,
convergence layer, to the access layer.
2.3.3 Interconnection to the OptiX DWDM Series Equipment
OptiX OSN 2500 can interconnect to the OptiX DWDM equipment through SDH or GE
interfaces.
2.3.4 Interconnection to the OptiX Metro Series Equipment
OptiX OSN 2500 can connect to the OptiX Metro series equipment through SDH, PDH, Ethernet,
ATM and DDN interfaces.

2.3.1 Interconnection Abilities


The OptiX OSN 2500 can interconnect to the Huawei OptiX OSN, DWDM and Metro series
equipment to provide an integrated transmission network solution.
Figure 2-2 shows the application of the integrated MAN network where the OptiX OSN 2500
is interconnected to other equipment.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
2 Planning Network Layers Planning Guidelines

Figure 2-2 Hybrid networking of the OptiX OSN 2500 and other equipment
iManager T2000/
T2100
DWDM

Backbone layer
OptiX OSN 3500
STM-64
STM-64 ring ring
OptiX 10G

OptiX 10G
OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX 10G

STM-16 ring STM-16 ring Convergence layer


OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN
3500
OptiX OSN
STM-1/4
2500
ring
STM-1/4 ring OptiX OSN
STM-1/4 2500
ring
OptiX OSN
OptiX OSN 1500
1500 OptiX OSN 2500
Access layer
MSTP MADM ADM

OptiX OSN 9500 DWDM

NOTE

When the OptiX OSN 2500 is interconnected to the third party equipment, contact Huawei engineers.

2.3.2 Interconnection to the OptiX OSN Series Equipment


OptiX OSN 2500 is connected to other OptiX OSN series equipment to construct a hybrid
network, which can complete an integrated intelligent solution from the backbone layer,
convergence layer, to the access layer.
The OptiX OSN series equipment consists of the OptiX OSN 9500, OptiX OSN 7500, OptiX
OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 3500T, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 2500 REG and OptiX OSN 1500.
There are no restraints when the OptiX OSN 2500 is interconnected to other OptiX OSN series
equipment.
Figure 2-3 shows the application of the hybrid networking where the OptiX OSN 2500 is
connected to other OptiX OSN series equipment.

2-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 2 Planning Network Layers

Figure 2-3 Hybrid networking of the OptiX OSN 2500 and other OSN series equipment
OptiX OSN 9500

OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 7500

Backbone layer

OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 3500

Convergence layer

OptiX OSN 1500 OptiX OSN 2500

Access layer

GSM/CDMA/
PSTN Ethernet ... ATM SAN
WCDMA

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)


Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Public Switched Telephony Network (PSTN)
Storage Area Network (SAN)
Ethernet

2.3.3 Interconnection to the OptiX DWDM Series Equipment


OptiX OSN 2500 can interconnect to the OptiX DWDM equipment through SDH or GE
interfaces.
The OptiX DWDM series equipment consists of the OptiX BWS 1600G, OptiX Metro 6100,
and OptiX Metro 6040.

Interconnection Through SDH Interfaces


In the case of interconnection through SDH interfaces, if fixed wavelength optical modules
compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 and ITU-T G.694.2 are used, the OptiX WDM multiplex and
demultiplex units can be directly accessed without using a specific OTU. As shown in Figure
2-4, the OTU is specified in the dashed area.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
2 Planning Network Layers Planning Guidelines

Figure 2-4 Interconnection of the OptiX OSN 2500 to the OptiX WDM equipment through SDH
interfaces

FOA
Tx Rx
STM-16

SF16/ OTU OM and OD


SL16

FOA
Rx Tx
STM-16

OptiX OSN 2500 WDM equipment


Fixed optical attenuator (FOA) Optical multiplexer (OM)
Optical transponder unit (OTU) Optical demultiplexer (OD)

In the case of the OptiX OSN 2500, the SF16 and SL16 boards support fixed wavelength optical
modules compliant with G.694.1 and G.694.2 and can directly interconnect to the OptiX WDM
equipment. For specifications of optical modules of the SF16 and SL16 boards, refer to the
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Hardware Description. For
specifications of optical modules of boards on the OptiX WDM equipment, refer to the OptiX
WDM equipment manuals.

Interconnection Through GE Interfaces


In the case of interconnection through GE interfaces, the interconnected OptiX WDM equipment
should provide an OTU with a specific wavelength to perform the wavelength conversion.
Figure 2-5 shows the interconnection through GE interfaces.

Figure 2-5 Interconnection of the OptiX OSN 2500 to the OptiX WDM equipment through GE
interfaces

FOA
Tx Rx
EGS2/
EGT2/ GE
EMS4/
EGS4/ OTU OM and OD
EMR0/
EGR2 FOA
Rx Tx
GE

OptiX OSN 2500 WDM equipment


Fixed optical attenuator (FOA) Optical multiplexer (OM)
Optical transponder unit (OTU) Optical demultiplexer (OD)

In the case of the OptiX OSN 2500, the EGS2, EGT2, EMS4, EGS4, EMR0 and EGR2 boards
can interconnect to the OptiX WDM equipment through GE interfaces. For specifications of
optical modules of the EGS2, EGT2, EMS4, EGS4, EMR0 and EGR2 boards, refer to the OptiX

2-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 2 Planning Network Layers

OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Hardware Description. For specifications
of optical modules of the OTU on the OptiX WDM equipment, refer to the OptiX WDM
equipment manuals.

2.3.4 Interconnection to the OptiX Metro Series Equipment


OptiX OSN 2500 can connect to the OptiX Metro series equipment through SDH, PDH, Ethernet,
ATM and DDN interfaces.

The OptiX Metro series equipment consists of the OptiX 10G(Metro5000), OptiX 2500+
(Metro3000), OptiX 155/622(Metro2050), OptiX 155/622H(Metro1000).

l In the case of the SDH, PDH, ATM, and DDN services, there are no constraints when the
OptiX OSN 2500 interconnects to the OptiX Metro series equipment.
l In the case of the Ethernet service, the OptiX OSN 2500 cannot interconnect to the boards
for the OptiX 2500+(Metro3000) that takes the ML-PPP as the encapsulation protocol. When
the OptiX OSN 2500 interconnects to other Ethernet boards for the OptiX 2500+
(Metro3000) or OptiX 10G(Metro5000), there are no constraints.

2.4 Network Management Abilities of the T2000 and the


Computation of the Abilities
The T2000 performs management and maintenance operations on the OptiX OSN 2500. During
the network planning, consider the management abilities of the T2000 to select the hardware
and management domains of the T2000.

Number of the OptiX OSN 2500 NEs Managed by the T2000


One set of the T2000 software can manage OptiX OSN 2500 NEs as follows:

l A maximum of 444 OptiX OSN 2500 NEs on which the ASON features are enabled
l A maximum of 571 OptiX OSN 2500 NEs on which the ASON features are not enabled

Computation Formulas for the Management Abilities


Computation formulas for the management abilities of the T2000 are as follows:

l Formula one: Number of the maximum manageable STM-1 NEs = 1000 x Management
ability coefficient of the hardware platform
l Formula two: Number of the maximum manageable NEs = Number of the maximum
manageable STM-1 NEs ÷ Coefficient of the NEs equivalent to the STM-1 NEs

Computation Methods for the Management Abilities


The management abilities of the T2000 refer to the number of the maximum manageable NEs
when the specified performance specifications are met. At present, a set of T2000 software can
manage a maximum of 2000 STM-1 NEs.

When the T2000 manages networks composed of different types of NEs, the management
abilities can be computed from the preceding data. During the computation, the following factors
should be considered:

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
2 Planning Network Layers Planning Guidelines

l The number of fibers and services can be different for different types of NEs, and thus the
size of the databases varies. In this case, the coefficients of different types of NEs equivalent
to the STM-1 NEs can be computed. The coefficient of the OptiX OSN 2500 equivalent to
the STM-1 NEs is 4.5 (with the ASON features) or 3.5 (without the ASON features).
l Different hardware platforms affect the management abilities of the T2000, especially the
T2000 server. The client can also be affected. See Table 2-1.
l If the client and server are running on the same computer, the management abilities can be
reduced by 50%. Thus, the client and the server should run on separate computers. In this
case, the effect of the client on the management abilities of the server can be disregarded.

Table 2-1 List of management ability coefficients on different hardware platforms


Hardware Platform Management Maximum Number of
Ability Accessed Clients
Coefficient

SUN Netra240 0.6 16

SUN Netra240 dual node 0.6 16

SUN Fire V890 (2CPU) 1 24

SUN Fire V890 (4CPU) 1.5 32

Fujitsu PW 650 (2CPU) 1 24

Fujitsu PW 650 (4CPU) 1.5 35

SUN Fire E4900 2 32

DELL PE 6800 1.5 32

DELL PE 2900 1 24

DELL PE 840 0.6 16

2-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 3 Planning Networking

3 Planning Networking

About This Chapter

When planning the networking, follow the basic principles, and consider the NE types and
networking modes supported by the OptiX OSN 2500.

3.1 Basic Principles


When planning the transmission network, consider the line structure, service type, and service
requirement.
3.2 NE Types Supported by the Equipment
In a network, OptiX OSN 2500 can be configured as different types of NEs, including TM,
ADM, MADM, REG, and a combination of these NE types.
3.3 Networking Modes Supported by the Equipment
OptiX OSN 2500 supports networking modes, such as the chain, ring, tangent rings, intersecting
rings, ring with chain, DNI, HUB, and mesh, at the STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 levels.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
3 Planning Networking Planning Guidelines

3.1 Basic Principles


When planning the transmission network, consider the line structure, service type, and service
requirement.
Adhere to the following principles:
l Consider the line structure, service type, service flow and protection requirements as a
whole. Thus, services can be fully protected through networking planning and data
configuration.
l Use the ring topology as the network topology type. When the ASON features are enabled,
use the mesh topology.
l In the case of the intersecting rings, use high-rate equipment at the junction nodes to avoid
service bottlenecks during the timeslot configuration, service upgrade, and service
expansion. For example, in the case of the STM-4 intersecting rings, use the STM-64
equipment at the junction nodes.
l The DNI is mainly used on intersecting rings, at gateway nodes with great service capacity,
and for connecting tandem offices. The primary advantage of the DNI is to provide
protection when node failures occur.
l Configure less than 20 nodes in a ring network to avoid performance degrade of clock
tracing caused by excessive nodes.
l Choose a proper service rate for the network according to the existing service capacity and
demands of future network expansion.
l Determine the equipment type of each node according to the network topology, service
capacity of the node, and equipment features.

3.2 NE Types Supported by the Equipment


In a network, OptiX OSN 2500 can be configured as different types of NEs, including TM,
ADM, MADM, REG, and a combination of these NE types.

3.2.1 TM
When configuring the OptiX OSN 2500 as a TM NE, install an optical interface board in the
corresponding slot in the subrack as the line board, and install the integrated board of the
tributary, line, SCC, cross-connect and timing units, PIU board, and auxiliary interface board.
3.2.2 ADM
When configuring the OptiX OSN 2500 as an ADM NE, install two optical interface boards in
the corresponding slots in the subrack as the line boards, and install the integrated board of the
tributary, line, SCC, cross-connect and timing units, PIU board, and auxiliary interface board.
3.2.3 MADM
The OptiX OSN 2500 can be configured as an MADM NE when combined with ADMs at the
rates ranging from STM-1 to STM-16.
3.2.4 REG
The OptiX OSN 2500 equipment can use a line board to regenerate signals.

3-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 3 Planning Networking

3.2.1 TM
When configuring the OptiX OSN 2500 as a TM NE, install an optical interface board in the
corresponding slot in the subrack as the line board, and install the integrated board of the
tributary, line, SCC, cross-connect and timing units, PIU board, and auxiliary interface board.
Figure 3-1 shows the hardware configuration when the OptiX OSN 2500 serves as an STM-16
TM NE.
l Configure one CXL16 board to transmit and receive STM-16 signals. The CXL16 can also
realize the system control and communication, service cross-connection and system timing.
In addition, two CXL16 boards can be used to realize the 1+1 hot backup for the cross-
connect, timing, and SCC units.
l Configure one PQ1 board and two D75S interface boards to transmit and receive the E1
signals.
l Configure two PIU boards to access the –48 V power. The two PIU boards serve as a mutual
backup for each other.
l Configure one AUX board and one SAP board to provide various auxiliary interfaces.
l Configure two FAN boards to dissipate heat for the equipment.
l Insert boards into other slots on the equipment according to the service requirements.

Figure 3-1 Hardware configuration when the OptiX OSN 2500 serves as an STM-16 TM NE

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5/ 6/ 7/ 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
19 20 21
CXL16
CXL16
D75S
D75S

SAP
PQ1

Fiber Routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
(SLOT22) (SLOT24) (SLOT25) (SLOT23)

NOTE

Slots 5–7 of the OptiX OSN 2500 can be divided into two half-height slots respectively, which can house
the STM-1 or STM-4 optical interface boards (half-height). After the slots are divided, the slots in the lower
portion are slots 5–7, and the slots in the upper portion are slots 19–21.

3.2.2 ADM
When configuring the OptiX OSN 2500 as an ADM NE, install two optical interface boards in
the corresponding slots in the subrack as the line boards, and install the integrated board of the
tributary, line, SCC, cross-connect and timing units, PIU board, and auxiliary interface board.
Figure 3-2 shows the hardware configuration when the OptiX OSN 2500 serves as an STM-16
ADM NE.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
3 Planning Networking Planning Guidelines

l Configure two CXL16 boards to transmit and receive STM-16 signals. The CXL16 boards
can also realize the system control and communication, service cross-connection and
system timing. In addition, the CXL16 boards can be used to realize the 1+1 hot backup
for the cross-connect, timing, and SCC units.
l Configure one PQ1 board and two D75S interface boards to transmit and receive the E1
signals.
l Configure two PIU boards to access the –48 V power. The two PIU boards serve as a mutual
backup for each other.
l Configure one SEI board and one SAP board to provide various auxiliary interfaces.
l Configure two FAN boards to dissipate heat for the equipment.
l Insert boards into other slots on the equipment according to the service requirements.

Figure 3-2 Hardware configuration when the OptiX OSN 2500 serves as an STM-16 ADM NE

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5/ 6/ 7/ 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
19 20 21
CXL16
CXL16
D75S
D75S

SAP
PQ1

Fiber Routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
(SLOT22) (SLOT24) (SLOT25) (SLOT23)

3.2.3 MADM
The OptiX OSN 2500 can be configured as an MADM NE when combined with ADMs at the
rates ranging from STM-1 to STM-16.

Figure 3-3 shows the hardware configuration when the OptiX OSN 2500 serves as an STM-16
and STM-4 MADM NE.

l Configure two CXL16 boards to realize the ADM function for the STM-16 signals, system
control and communication, service cross-connection, and system timing. In addition, the
CXL16 boards realize the 1+1 hot backup for the cross-connect, timing, and SCC units.
l Configure four SL4 boards to complete the ADM function for the STM-4 signals.
l Configure one PQ1 board and two D75S interface boards to transmit and receive the E1
signals.
l Configure two PIU boards to access the –48 V power. The two PIU boards serve as a mutual
backup for each other.
l Configure one SEI board and one SAP board to provide various auxiliary interfaces.
l Configure two FAN boards to dissipate heat for the equipment.

3-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 3 Planning Networking

l Insert boards into other slots on the equipment according to the service requirements.

Figure 3-3 Hardware configuration when the OptiX OSN 2500 serves as an STM-16 and STM-4
MADM NE

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5/ 6/ 7/ 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
19 20 21

CXL16
CXL16
D75S
D75S

SAP
PQ1

SL4

SL4
SL4

SL4
Fiber Routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
(SLOT22) (SLOT24) (SLOT25) (SLOT23)

3.2.4 REG
The OptiX OSN 2500 equipment can use a line board to regenerate signals.
NOTE

First enable the REG function of the line board on the T2000 to generate signals.

As shown in Figure 3-4, the OptiX OSN 2500 supports the hybrid application of the ADM and
REG.
l Two SL16 boards for the OptiX OSN 2500 form the REG, which connects to the uplink
and downlink SL16 boards.
l Two SL4 boards for the OptiX OSN 2500 form the ADM, which connects to the uplink
and downlink SL4 boards.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
3 Planning Networking Planning Guidelines

Figure 3-4 Hybrid application of the ADM and REG supported by the OptiX OSN 2500

REG

SL16 SL16 SL16 SL16


IN OUT OUT IN

OUT IN IN OUT

OSN OSN
Equipment SL4 OptiX OSN 2500 Equipment
SL4
IN OUT OUT IN

OUT IN IN OUT
PQ1

OSN SL4 SL4 OSN


Equipment Equipment
ADM

Table 3-1 lists the boards that support the REG function, and Table 3-2 lists the optical interfaces
that support the REG function.

Table 3-1 Boards that support the REG function

Board Function Description

N2SL16, In the REG mode, the board only processes the frame header and RSOH.
N3SL16,
N2SL16A,
N3SL16A

Table 3-2 Optical interface types that support the REG function

Board Optical Interface Type

N2SL16A, I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2


N3SL16A

N2SL16, N3SL16 L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je

Figure 3-5 shows the hardware configuration when the OptiX OSN 2500 serves as an STM-4
ADM NE and an STM-16 REG.

l Configure two CXL16 boards to realize the system control and communication, service
cross-connection, and system timing. The two CXL16 serve as a mutual backup for each
other.

3-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 3 Planning Networking

l Configure two SL4 boards to complete the ADM function for the STM-4 signals.
l Configure two SL16 boards to regenerate the optical signals at the STM-16 level.
l Configure one PQ1 board and two D75S interface boards to transmit and receive the E1
signals.
l Configure two PIU boards to access the –48 V power. The two PIU boards serve as a mutual
backup for each other.
l Configure one SEI board and one SAP board to provide various auxiliary interfaces.
l Configure two FAN boards to dissipate heat for the equipment.
l Insert boards into other slots on the equipment according to the service requirements.

Figure 3-5 Hardware configuration when the OptiX OSN 2500 serves as an STM-4 ADM and
an STM-16 REG

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5/ 6/ 7/ 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
19 20 21
CXL16
CXL16
D75S
D75S

SL16
SL16

SAP
PQ1
SL4

SL4

Fiber Routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
(SLOT22) (SLOT24) (SLOT25) (SLOT23)
2 x STM-16
REG
STM-4
ADM

3.3 Networking Modes Supported by the Equipment


OptiX OSN 2500 supports networking modes, such as the chain, ring, tangent rings, intersecting
rings, ring with chain, DNI, HUB, and mesh, at the STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 levels.

Table 3-3 lists the networking modes supported by the OptiX OSN 2500.

Table 3-3 Networking modes and topologies supported by the OptiX OSN 2500

Networking Topology
Mode

Chain

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
3 Planning Networking Planning Guidelines

Networking Topology
Mode

Ring

Tangent rings

Intersecting rings

Ring with chain

DNI

HUB

3-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 3 Planning Networking

Networking Topology
Mode

Mesh

Note:

MADM ADM TM ASON NE

The OptiX OSN 2500 with the enabled ASON features supports the mesh network and the
rerouting protection scheme. Thus, the network reliability and bandwidth utilization can be
enhanced.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 4 Planning Network Protection

4 Planning Network Protection

About This Chapter

The network protection is provided for services in the entire network instead of a single NE. The
network protection protects the SDH, Ethernet, and ATM services. Thus, proper planning can
ensure the effectiveness of the network protection.

4.1 Basic Principles


Users can choose proper network protection schemes according to the features of network
protection schemes and application scenarios.
4.2 Network Protection Schemes Supported by the Equipment
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports network protection schemes for the SDH service, the Ethernet
service, and the ATM service.
4.3 Planning the MSP Ring
The MSP ring, widely used in the SDH network, includes the four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring,
two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring, and two-fiber unidirectional MSP ring.
4.4 Planning the SNCP
The SNCP, widely used in the SDH network, includes the SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP.
4.5 Planning the 1+1 Linear MSP
The 1+1 linear MSP, used in the SDH chain network, has high switching speed, high reliability,
and low bandwidth utilization.
4.6 Planning the 1:N Linear MSP
The 1:N linear MSP is used in the SDH chain network. One protection channel protects services
on N working channels. However, two faulty working channels cannot be protected at the same
time. When all the channels are normal, the protection channel can carry extra services.
4.7 Planning the DNI Protection
The DNI protection can be configured on two interconnected nodes. The DNI protection
enhances the reliability of the services between the two rings.
4.8 Planning the Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection
For the fiber-shared virtual trail protection, two or multiple ring networks share the same fiber.
The capacity of the fiber is classified and divided into different protection groups in VC-4
granularities. Thus, multiple network protection schemes can be used in one optical fiber. The

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
4 Planning Network Protection Planning Guidelines

fiber-shared virtual trail protection enhances the survivability of the network and bandwidth
utilization.
4.9 Planning the Optical-Path-Shared MSP
For the optical-path-shared MSP, two MSP groups can be configured into one optical interface.
Thus, multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical interfaces.
4.10 Planning the Ethernet RPR Protection
The RPR protection, used for the Ethernet, can coexist with the MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and
SNCTP schemes at the SDH layer.
4.11 Planning the VP-Ring and VC-Ring Protection Schemes for the ATM Service
The VP-Ring and VC-Ring, used for the ATM services, can coexist with the MSP, SNCP,
SNCMP, and SNCTP schemes at the SDH layer.

4-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 4 Planning Network Protection

4.1 Basic Principles


Users can choose proper network protection schemes according to the features of network
protection schemes and application scenarios.
Adhere to the following principles when planning network protection.
l At the access layer, the service capacity is small, and most services are converged at a
central node. Thus, the unidirectional SNCP ring is applicable.
l In the case of the inter-office communication, the service capacity of each node is large,
and a larger service adding/dropping capability is required. Thus, the bidirectional MSP
ring is applicable.
l When services on the ring are discrete, the two-fiber bidirectional MSP is applicable. In
the case of extreme situations, when services only travel between two adjacent nodes, the
maximum service capacity on the ring is STM-N x K/2 ( "K" represents the number of
nodes). In this case, the resource utilization is large. However, the MSP, which needs the
support of the automatic protection switching (APS) protocol, has complex protection
mechanisms and strict network maintenance requirements.
l The MSP can protect node failures.
l The optical-path-shared MSP ring protects services in VC-4 granularities. This protection
scheme is used for services of a large volume. Generally, this scheme is used for the services
at the STM-64 and STM-16 levels.
l The SNCP scheme is applied to protect services at the VC-4, VC-3 or VC-12 level. Hence,
the SNCP scheme has more flexibility.
l The SNCP is the 1+1 protection, and the SNCMP is the N+1 protection, in which multiple
protection channels protect one working channel.
l The SNCTP scheme is applied to protect services at the VC-4 path. When the working
channel is faulty, services are switched to the protection channels.
l The SNCTP is mainly used at the backbone layer and the convergence layer. Compared to
the MSP, the SNCTP requires a simplified network topology.
l In the case of the inter-ring and ring with chain services, the SNCP, SNCMP, SNCTP or
MSP is applicable.
l Protection schemes for the chain network include the 1+1 linear MSP and the 1:N linear
MSP. In the case of 1:N linear MSP, protection routes can carry extra services. Thus, the
network utilization is enhanced. When rapid service restoration after the switching is
required, the 1+1 protection is applicable.
l The DNI is mainly used on intersecting rings and at gateway nodes with great service
capacity, or used for connecting tandem offices. The primary advantage of the DNI is that
it provides protection when multi-node failures occur.

4.2 Network Protection Schemes Supported by the


Equipment
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports network protection schemes for the SDH service, the Ethernet
service, and the ATM service.
Table 4-1 lists the network protection schemes supported by the 2500.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
4 Planning Network Protection Planning Guidelines

Table 4-1 Network protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 2500

Protection Level Protection Scheme

SDH network protection MSP

SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP

1+1 linear MSP

1:N linear MSP

DNI protection

Fiber-shared virtual trail protection

Optical-path-shared MSP

Network protection for the Resilient package ring (RPR) protection


Ethernet service in the Ethernet network

Network protection for the ATM VP-Ring, VC-Ring network protection


service

4.3 Planning the MSP Ring


The MSP ring, widely used in the SDH network, includes the four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring,
two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring, and two-fiber unidirectional MSP ring.
4.3.1 Capabilities of Supporting the MSP Ring
When planning the MSP ring for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider the capabilities of
supporting the MSP ring.
4.3.2 Planning Principles
To rationally and effectively plan the MSP ring, the planning principles should be followed.

4.3.1 Capabilities of Supporting the MSP Ring


When planning the MSP ring for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider the capabilities of
supporting the MSP ring.

The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the following types of MSP rings.

l Four-fiber bidirectional MSP ring


l Two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring
l Two-fiber unidirectional MSP ring

The MSP ring of the OptiX OSN 2500 supports the following functions.

l The MSP ring supports the in-service MS bandwidth expansion without interrupting
services (for example, upgrading the MSP ring at the STM-4 level to the MSP ring at the
STM-16 level).
l Boards that carry STM-16 services support configuring a single optical interface into a
maximum of two MSP rings.

4-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 4 Planning Network Protection

l The MSP ring supports the MS suppression at the VC-4 level.


l The OptiX OSN 2500 supports a maximum of 12 MSP protection ring groups.

Table 4-2 lists the maximum number of MSP rings at the STM-4 and STM-16 levels on the
optical interface board for the OptiX OSN 2500.

Table 4-2 Capability of supporting the MSP rings of the OptiX OSN 2500

Protection Scheme Maximum Number of


Protection Rings

Four-fiber MSP ring at the STM-16 level 1

Two-fiber MSP ring at the STM-16 level 3

Four-fiber MSP ring at the STM-4 level 6

Two-fiber MSP ring at the STM-4 level 12

4.3.2 Planning Principles


To rationally and effectively plan the MSP ring, the planning principles should be followed.

Adhere to the following principles when planning the MSP ring.

l The number of nodes on an MSP ring should not exceed 16.


l On the bidirectional MSP ring, services are configured on half of the VC-4 channels, and
the other half of the VC-4 channels are used as protection channels. If extra services are
configured on the protection channels, these services are unavailable when protection
switching occurs.
l When configuring an MSP ring, insert the two boards that form the ring into paired slots.
The paired slots are listed in Table 4-3.

Table 4-3 OptiX OSN 2500 paired slots

Slot Division Paired Slots


Status

Before division of (Slot 6, Slot 13)


slots (Slot 7, Slot 12)
(Slot 8, Slot 11)
(Slot 9, Slot 10)

After division of (Slot 5, Slot 19)


slots (Slot 6, Slot 20)
(Slot 7, Slot 21)
(Slot 8, Slot 11)
(Slot 9, Slot 10)

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
4 Planning Network Protection Planning Guidelines

l On an MSP ring, do not form an ADM NE by using different optical interfaces on the same
multichannel optical interface board. Otherwise, services in the two directions of the ADM
are unavailable at the same time, when the board fails.
l When using the multichannel optical interface board to form an MSP ring, use the optical
interfaces with the same sequence number on the two boards that form the ring.
l It is recommended that you set the WTR time of the MSP ring to 600s.
l It is recommended that you set the B2_SD as the trigger condition of the MSP ring
protection switching.

4.4 Planning the SNCP


The SNCP, widely used in the SDH network, includes the SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP.
4.4.1 Capabilities of Supporting the SNCP
When planning the SNCP for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider the capabilities of supporting
the SNCP.
4.4.2 Planning Principles
To rationally and effectively plan the SNCP, the planning principles should be followed.

4.4.1 Capabilities of Supporting the SNCP


When planning the SNCP for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider the capabilities of supporting
the SNCP.

In the case of the OptiX OSN 2500, the capabilities of supporting the SNCP, SNCMP, and
SNCTP schemes are listed as follows:

l In the case of the OptiX OSN 2500, the SDH processing boards at the STM-16, STM-4,
and STM-1 levels all support the SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP.
l The SNCP function of the OptiX OSN 2500 is compliant with ITU-T G.841 and G.842.
l The OptiX OSN 2500 supports a maximum of 1184 SNCP groups. The SNCP groups are
of the VC-4, VC-3 or VC-12 level.
l The SNCMP of the OptiX OSN 2500 support a maximum of 3+1 multichannel SNCP
schemes. In addition, it supports a maximum of 592 SNCMP protection groups.
l The OptiX OSN 2500 supports a maximum of 512 SNCTP groups. The SNCTP protection
group is of the VC-4 level. In addition, the SNCTP tunnel can carry services of the VC-4,
VC-3 or VC-12 level.

4.4.2 Planning Principles


To rationally and effectively plan the SNCP, the planning principles should be followed.

Adhere to the following principles when planning the SNCP.

l In the case of the ring and ring with chain networks at the STM-1 level, the SNCP is
recommended if the services on the ring are centralized.
l When the SNCP and the MSP coexist, set the hold-off time of the SNCP longer than the
switching time (50 ms) of the MSP to avoid the interference between the SNCP and the
MSP.

4-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 4 Planning Network Protection

l In the DNI networking, the primary and secondary nodes of the SNCP, SNCMP, and
SNCTP should be correctly set on the ring in the same direction.
l In the DNI networking, the SNCP and linear MSP schemes cannot be used on the chain at
the same time.
l The WTR time of the SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP should be set to 600s.
l The SNCTP can coexist with the MSP ring. The SNCTP can share the sink and then can
coexist with the SNCP and SNCMP. The SNCTP does not support the coexistence with
the linear MS.
l The SNCMP feature and the ASON feature conflict with each other. If a node is configured
with the SNCMP feature, the ASON feature cannot be configured for the node. If a node
is configured with the ASON feature, the SNCMP feature cannot be configured for the
node.
l The SNCMP cannot coexist with the MS ring and linear MS.

4.5 Planning the 1+1 Linear MSP


The 1+1 linear MSP, used in the SDH chain network, has high switching speed, high reliability,
and low bandwidth utilization.
4.5.1 Capabilities of Supporting the 1+1 Linear MSP
When planning the 1+1 linear MSP for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider the capabilities of
supporting the 1+1 linear MSP.
4.5.2 Planning Principles
To rationally and effectively plan the 1+1 linear MSP, the planning principles should be
followed.

4.5.1 Capabilities of Supporting the 1+1 Linear MSP


When planning the 1+1 linear MSP for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider the capabilities of
supporting the 1+1 linear MSP.
In the case of the OptiX OSN 2500, the capabilities of supporting the 1+1 MSP are as follows:
l The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the 1+1 MSP at the STM-64, STM-16, STM-4, and STM-1
levels.
l An OptiX OSN 2500 system supports a maximum of 12 1+1 linear MSP groups.
l The switching and bridging mode supports the single-ended and dual-ended switchings.
l The switching revertive mode supports the revertive mode and non-revertive mode.

4.5.2 Planning Principles


To rationally and effectively plan the 1+1 linear MSP, the planning principles should be
followed.
Adhere to the following principles when planning the 1+1 linear MSP.
l Do not use different optical interfaces on one multichannel optical interface board to form
the 1+1 protection group. Otherwise, the protection function is unavailable when the board
fails.
l The switching and bridging mode should be set to the single-ended switching.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
4 Planning Network Protection Planning Guidelines

l The switching revertive mode should be set to the non-revertive mode.


l It is recommended that you set the B2_SD as the trigger condition of the linear MSP ring
protection switching.

4.6 Planning the 1:N Linear MSP


The 1:N linear MSP is used in the SDH chain network. One protection channel protects services
on N working channels. However, two faulty working channels cannot be protected at the same
time. When all the channels are normal, the protection channel can carry extra services.
4.6.1 Capabilities of Supporting the 1:N Linear MSP
When planning the 1:N linear MSP for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider the capabilities of
supporting the 1:N linear MSP.
4.6.2 Planning Principles
To rationally and effectively plan the 1:N linear MSP, the planning principles should be
followed.

4.6.1 Capabilities of Supporting the 1:N Linear MSP


When planning the 1:N linear MSP for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider the capabilities of
supporting the 1:N linear MSP.

The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the 1:N linear MSP at the following levels:

l 1:N (1≤N≤14) linear MSP at the STM-16 level


l 1:N (1≤N≤14) linear MSP at the STM-4 level
l 1:N (1≤N≤14) linear MSP at the STM-1 level

In the case of the OptiX OSN 2500, the capabilities of supporting the 1:N linear MSP are as
follows:

l An OptiX OSN 2500 system supports a maximum of 12 1:N linear MSP groups.
l The switching and bridging mode is the dual-ended switching.
l The switching revertive mode is the revertive.

4.6.2 Planning Principles


To rationally and effectively plan the 1:N linear MSP, the planning principles should be
followed.

Adhere to the following principles when planning the 1:N linear MSP.

l Do not use different optical/electrical interfaces on the same multichannel optical/electrical


interface board to form a 1:N protection group. Otherwise, the protection function is
unavailable when the board fails.
l In the 1:N protection scheme, the protection route can carry extra services, but the extra
services cannot be protected.
l It is recommended that you set the WTR time of the linear MSP ring to 600s.
l It is recommended that you set the B2_SD as the trigger condition of the linear MSP ring
protection switching.

4-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 4 Planning Network Protection

4.7 Planning the DNI Protection


The DNI protection can be configured on two interconnected nodes. The DNI protection
enhances the reliability of the services between the two rings.
4.7.1 Capabilities of Supporting the DNI Protection
When planning the DNI protection for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider the capabilities of
supporting the DNI protection.
4.7.2 Planning Principles
To rationally and effectively plan the DNI protection, the planning principles should be followed.

4.7.1 Capabilities of Supporting the DNI Protection


When planning the DNI protection for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider the capabilities of
supporting the DNI protection.
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the DNI protection compliant with ITU-T G.842.

4.7.2 Planning Principles


To rationally and effectively plan the DNI protection, the planning principles should be followed.
Adhere to the following principles when planning the DNI protection.
l The DNI network combines the ring network and the chain network. Two rings in a DNI
network can be configured with the SNCP, SNCMP, SNCTP or MSP.
l The chain that connects the two rings can be configured with the DNI protection or the
fiber-shared virtual trail protection.

4.8 Planning the Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection


For the fiber-shared virtual trail protection, two or multiple ring networks share the same fiber.
The capacity of the fiber is classified and divided into different protection groups in VC-4
granularities. Thus, multiple network protection schemes can be used in one optical fiber. The
fiber-shared virtual trail protection enhances the survivability of the network and bandwidth
utilization.
4.8.1 Capabilities of Supporting the Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection
When planning the fiber-shared virtual trail protection for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider
the capabilities of supporting the fiber-shared virtual trail protection.
4.8.2 Planning Principles
To rationally and effectively plan the fiber-shared virtual trail protection, the planning principles
should be followed.

4.8.1 Capabilities of Supporting the Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail


Protection
When planning the fiber-shared virtual trail protection for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider
the capabilities of supporting the fiber-shared virtual trail protection.
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports two MSP rings sharing the same section of fiber.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
4 Planning Network Protection Planning Guidelines

4.8.2 Planning Principles


To rationally and effectively plan the fiber-shared virtual trail protection, the planning principles
should be followed.

For details, see 4.9 Planning the Optical-Path-Shared MSP.

4.9 Planning the Optical-Path-Shared MSP


For the optical-path-shared MSP, two MSP groups can be configured into one optical interface.
Thus, multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical interfaces.
4.9.1 Capabilities of Supporting the Optical-Path-Shared MSP
When planning the optical-path-shared MSP for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider the
capabilities of supporting the optical-path-shared MSP.
4.9.2 Planning Principles
To rationally and effectively plan the optical-path-shared MSP protection, the planning
principles should be followed.

4.9.1 Capabilities of Supporting the Optical-Path-Shared MSP


When planning the optical-path-shared MSP for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider the
capabilities of supporting the optical-path-shared MSP.

In the case of the optical-path-shared MSP, one optical interface can be configured into two
MSP groups. Thus, multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical interface.

The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the configuration of the optical-path-shared MSP.

l The SF16 and SL16 boards can process two sets of K bytes, which are located in the first
and fifth STM-1s. The SF16 and SL16 boards support configuring a single optical interface
into a maximum of two MSP rings.

4.9.2 Planning Principles


To rationally and effectively plan the optical-path-shared MSP protection, the planning
principles should be followed.

In normal situations, in the case of the optical-path-shared MSP, two low-rate line units share
the same high-rate line unit. See Figure 4-1.

Figure 4-1 Two low-rate line units sharing the same high-rate line unit

MSP ring 1
STM-4

STM-16

MSP ring 2 STM-4

4-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 4 Planning Network Protection

In the optical-path-shared MSP, two line units at the same rate can share the same line unit. See
Figure 4-2. In this case, the STM-16 line units of the MSP ring 1 and MSP ring 2 can only add
partial VC-4s into the MSP ring groups.

Figure 4-2 Two line units with the same rate sharing the same line unit

MSP ring 1
STM-16

STM-16
MSP ring 2 STM-16

When the optical-path-shared MSP is configured, on the protection ring, the optical interfaces
in two directions need not be configured into paired slots.

4.10 Planning the Ethernet RPR Protection


The RPR protection, used for the Ethernet, can coexist with the MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and
SNCTP schemes at the SDH layer.
4.10.1 Capabilities of Supporting the Ethernet RPR Protection
When planning the Ethernet RPR protection for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider the
capabilities of supporting the Ethernet RPR protection.
4.10.2 Planning Principles
To rationally and effectively plan the Ethernet RPR protection, the planning principles should
be followed.

4.10.1 Capabilities of Supporting the Ethernet RPR Protection


When planning the Ethernet RPR protection for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider the
capabilities of supporting the Ethernet RPR protection.

In the case of the OptiX OSN 2500, the capabilities of supporting the Ethernet RPR protection
are as follows:

l The EMR0 and EGR2 boards for the OptiX OSN 2500 support the RPR ring defined by
IEEE 802.17.
l The RPR ring can support a maximum of 255 nodes.
l The EVPL and EVPLAN services can be transmitted in the RPR ring network.
l The RPR ring network of the OptiX OSN 2500 supports three protection modes, wrapping,
steering (default) and wrapping+steering. When the number of nodes on the ring is less
than 16, the switching time of the steering mode is less than 50 ms.
l The RPR ring network of the OptiX OSN 2500 supports two protection revertive modes,
revertive (default) and non-revertive. The protection revertive modes at the RPR nodes can
be different.
l The RPR protection can coexist with the MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP schemes for
the SDH layer.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
4 Planning Network Protection Planning Guidelines

4.10.2 Planning Principles


To rationally and effectively plan the Ethernet RPR protection, the planning principles should
be followed.
The RPR protection is applicable to the ring network. The RPR protection can rapidly restore
the Ethernet services when fiber cuts and link failures occur. The principles for planning the
RPR protection are as follows:
l The number of the RPR nodes should not exceed 255.
l Before activating the protocol, set a valid node ID. The node ID should be unique in the
entire network. Setting the node ID after activating the protocol can reactivate the protocol.
l The protection mode should be unique in the entire network. Select the protection mode
according to the following rules:
– When the number of nodes in the ring network is less than 16, the steering mode is
recommended. Thus, the switching time is kept less than 50 ms, and the bandwidth is
efficiently used.
– When the network is of a large scale, the wrapping+steering mode is recommended.
Thus, the switching time is kept less than 50 ms, the packet loss is reduced, and the
bandwidth is efficiently used.
l The bandwidth of the RPR ring network should be planned in a network wide scale. The
bandwidth of the ring A0 service should be smaller than the overall bandwidth of the ring.
Otherwise, the alarm indicating the reserved bandwidth crossing is reported.
l When the protection for the SDH layer and the RPR protection coexist, the hold-off time
of the RPR protection switching should be set. It is recommended that you set the hold-off
time to 200 ms. When the switching requirements are met, the protection for the SDH layer
should be activated first.

4.11 Planning the VP-Ring and VC-Ring Protection


Schemes for the ATM Service
The VP-Ring and VC-Ring, used for the ATM services, can coexist with the MSP, SNCP,
SNCMP, and SNCTP schemes at the SDH layer.
4.11.1 Capabilities of Supporting the VP-Ring and VC-Ring Protection Schemes for the ATM
Service
When planning the VP-Ring and VC-Ring protection for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider
the capabilities of supporting the VP-Ring and VC-Ring protection.
4.11.2 Planning Principles
To rationally and effectively plan the VP-Ring and VC-Ring protection, the planning principles
should be followed.
4.11.3 Planning Examples
The planning of the VP-Ring protection for the ATM services is taken as an example.

4.11.1 Capabilities of Supporting the VP-Ring and VC-Ring


Protection Schemes for the ATM Service
When planning the VP-Ring and VC-Ring protection for the OptiX OSN 2500, first consider
the capabilities of supporting the VP-Ring and VC-Ring protection.

4-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 4 Planning Network Protection

The ATM board for the OptiX OSN 2500 supports the ATM layer protection schemes
recommended by ITU-T I.630, including the VP-Ring and VC-Ring protection schemes.
In the case of the OptiX OSN 2500, the capabilities of supporting the VP-Ring and VC-Ring
protection schemes for the ATM services are as follows:
l The VP-Ring and VC-Ring protection schemes include the 1+1 protection and the 1:1
protection.
– In the case of the 1+1 protection, the switching occurs at the sink end of the service,
and the protection mode is the revertive mode.
– In the case of the 1:1 protection, the switching occurs at both the source and sink ends
of the service, and the protection mode is the non-revertive mode.
l The VP-Ring and VC-Ring protection schemes can coexist with the MSP, SNCP, SNCMP
and SNCTP protection schemes for the SDH layer.

4.11.2 Planning Principles


To rationally and effectively plan the VP-Ring and VC-Ring protection, the planning principles
should be followed.
Adhere to the following principles when planning the VP-Ring and VC-Ring protection schemes
for the ATM services.
l It is recommended that you use the bidirectional MSP ring and VP-Ring/VC-Ring to form
the network. In this case, the VP-Ring or VC-Ring protection should be configured with a
hold-off time, which should exceed 4s. When the switching conditions are met, activate
the protection for the SDH layer first. If the switching at the SDH layer fails, activate the
VP-Ring or VC-Ring protection to realize the layered protection.
l In a network, when the VP-Ring or VC-Ring coexists with non-protection rings, the hold-
off time should be set to 0s. In this case, the VP-Ring or VC-Ring protection is of the first
level protection.
l Other protection schemes for the SDH layer can be combined with the VP-Ring or VC-
Ring. This configuration is not recommended because it is relatively complex and requires
greater bandwidth.

4.11.3 Planning Examples


The planning of the VP-Ring protection for the ATM services is taken as an example.

Service Requirements
In a city, the SDH network formed by NE 1, NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4 carries the ATM services.
The ATM services at NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4 originate from the digital subscriber line access
multiplexer (DSLAM). The ATM services should be transmitted to the ATM switch that serves
as the central node NE 1.
The ATM switch that serves as the central node provides one 155 Mbit/s optical interface to
access the ATM services from each node. The ATM services of each node are listed in Table
4-4.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
4 Planning Network Protection Planning Guidelines

Table 4-4 Requirements for the ATM services at each node


Transmission Source NE and Interface Sink Bandwidth
Type NE

Point-to-point NE 2: provides the 155 Mbit/s POS NE 1 3 x 10 Mbit/s


interface

Point-to-point NE 3: provides the 155 Mbit/s POS NE 1 2 x 20 Mbit/s


interface

Point-to-point NE 4: provides the 155 Mbit/s POS and 34 NE 1 1 x 30 Mbit/s


Mbit/s interfaces 1 x 20 Mbit/s

The ATM services at each node are of the constant bit rate (CBR) type.
The ATM services should be protected.

Networking Protection
The ATM services should be protected by the VP-Ring protection, but the services at the SDH
layer are not provided with protection. See Figure 4-3.

Figure 4-3 VP-Ring protection for the ATM services

(1,0) (2,0)
(3,0) (4,0) 155M
(1,0) (2,0)
(5,0) (6,0) (3,0) (4,0)
(7,0) (5,0) (6,0)
(7,0)

NE 1
10M 20M
(6,0)
(1,0) NE
NE 2
(2,0) 4
10M (1,0) (1,0) (2,0) (7,0)
(3,0) (2,0) (3,0) (4,0)
(3,0) (5,0) 30M
NE 3
10M
(6,0) (7,0)
(4,0) (5,0)
(6,0) (7,0)
(4,0) (5,0)
Values in the bracket 20M 20M
indicate (VPI, VCI)
ATM working route
ATM protection route

OptiX OSN ATM switch DSLAM


equipment

Realization Schemes
The statistical multiplexing + VP-Ring protection scheme should be used.

4-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 4 Planning Network Protection

On the working route, the ATM services accessed at NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4 are statistically
multiplexed into one VC-4. After that, they are converged at a port of the central node NE 1,
and then transmitted to the ATM switch at the upper layer.
On the protection route, the ATM services accessed at NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4 are statistically
multiplexed into another VC-4. After that, they are converged at the port used in the preceding
operation of the central node NE 1, and then transmitted to the upper layer ATM switch.
The directions of the working route and the protection route are different.

Hardware Configuration
Configure one ADQ1 board for NE 1 to converge the ATM services at each node, and then
transmit the services to the upper layer ATM switch through a 155 Mbit/s port.
Configure one ADQ1 board for NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4 respectively to access the ATM services
from the end office of DSLAM.
When accessing the ATM services through the 34M optical interface of NE 4, use both the ADQ1
and PL3 boards to access the 34 Mbit/s ATM services and to share the bandwidth on the ring.

Service Routes
Table 4-5 shows the working and protection routes at each node.

Table 4-5 ATM service routes in the VP-Ring protection mode


Route Type NE 1 NE 2 NE 3 NE 4

Working route ATM 10M service 1: Pass-through Pass-through


from NE 1 to NE external port ATM external service: ATM service: ATM
2 1 (1–3, 0) ← port 1 (1, 0) ← internal port 1 internal port 1 (1–
→ATM → ATM internal (1–3, 0) ←→ 3, 0) ←→ ATM
internal port port 1 (1, 0) ← ATM internal internal port 2 (1–
1 (1–3, 0) ← → VC-4 (No. 1) port 2 (1–3, 0) 3, 0) ←→ VC-4
→ VC-4 ←→ VC-4 (No. (No. 1)
(No. 1) 10M service 2: 1)
ATM external
port 2 (2, 0) ←
→ ATM internal
port 1 (2, 0) ←
→ VC-4 (No. 1)

10M service 3:
ATM external
port 3 (3, 0) ←
→ ATM internal
port 1 (3, 0) ←
→ VC-4 (No. 1)

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
4 Planning Network Protection Planning Guidelines

Protection route ATM 10M service 1: - -


from NE 1 to NE external port ATM external
2 1 (1–3, 0) ← port 1 (1, 0) ←
→ ATM → ATM internal
internal port port 2 (1, 0) ←
2 (1–3, 0) ← → VC-4 (No. 2)
→ VC-4
(No. 2) 10M service 2:
ATM external
port 2 (2, 0) ←
→ ATM internal
port 2 (2, 0) ←
→ VC-4 (No. 2)

10M service 3:
ATM external
port 3 (3, 0) ←
→ ATM internal
port 2 (3, 0) ←
→ VC-4 (No. 2)

Working route ATM - 20M service 1: Pass-through


from NE 1 to NE external port ATM external service: ATM
3 1 (4–5, 0) ← port 1 (4, 0) ← internal port 1 (4–
→ ATM → ATM internal 5, 0) ←→ ATM
internal port port 2 (4, 0) ← internal port 2 (4–
1 (4–5, 0) ← → VC-4 (No. 1) 5, 0) ←→ VC-4
→ VC-4 (No. 1)
(No. 1) 20M service 2:
ATM external
port 2 (5, 0) ←
→ ATM internal
port 2 (5, 0) ←
→ VC-4 (No. 1)

Protection route ATM Pass-through 20M service 1: -


from NE 1 to NE external port service: ATM ATM external
3 1 (4–5, 0) ← internal port 3 port 1 (4, 0) ←
→ ATM (4–5, 0) ←→ → ATM internal
internal port ATM internal port 3 (4, 0) ←
2 (4–5, 0) ← port 2 (4–5, 0) → VC-4 (No. 2)
→ VC-4 ←→ VC-4 (No.
(No. 2) 2) 20M service 2:
ATM external
port 2 (5, 0) ←
→ ATM internal
port 3 (5, 0) ←
→ VC-4 (No. 2)

4-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 4 Planning Network Protection

Working route ATM - - 20M service 1:


from NE 1 to NE external port PL3 interface ←
4 1 (6–7, 0) ← →ATM internal
→ ATM port 3 (6, 0) ←→
internal port ATM internal port
1 (6–7, 0) ← 2 (6, 0) ←→ VC-4
→ VC-4 (No. 1)
(No. 1)
30M service 1:
ATM external
port 1 (7, 0) ←→
ATM internal port
2 (7, 0) ←→ VC-4

Protection route ATM Pass-through Pass-through 20M service 1:


from NE 1 to NE external service: ATM service: ATM PL3 interface ←
4 port1 (6–7, internal port 3 external port 4 → ATM internal
0) ←→ ATM (6–7, 0) ←→ (6–7, 0) ←→ port 4 (6, 0) ←→
internal port ATM internal ATM internal ATM internal port
2 (6–7, 0) ← port 2 (6–7, 0) port 3 (6–7, 0) 3 (6, 0) ←→ VC-4
→ VC-4 ←→ VC-4 (No. ←→ VC-4 (No. (No. 2)
(No. 2) 2) 2)
30M service 1:
ATM external
port 1 (7, 0) ←→
ATM internal port
3 (7, 0) ←→ VC-4
(No. 2)

NOTE

The external ATM port is also the external optical interface where ATM services are accessed.
The internal ATM port is the logical port VCTRUNK, which is the port used to connect the ATM processing
module and the SDH cross-connect module.
The VP connection is used. The numbers in the brackets are values of the VPI and VCI. For example, (1,
0) indicates that the VPI value is 1 and the VCI value is 0.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 5 Planning the DCN

5 Planning the DCN

About This Chapter

The OptiX OSN 2500 can construct the DCN in three ways, HWECC, IP over DCC, and OSI
over DCC. When planning the DCN, follow the basic principles and specific principles for
different construction modes.

5.1 DCN Schemes Supported by the Equipment


In the SDH network, the T2000 communicates with NEs through the DCN, and thus the T2000
can manage and maintain the NEs. The NEs in the DCN use the DCC bytes to communicate
with each other. The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the HWECC, IP over DCC, and OSI over DCC
to construct the DCN.
5.2 Basic Principles
When constructing the DCN, select proper communication protocols according to the actual
networking situation, and follow the planning principles.
5.3 Planning NE IDs
NE IDs are used to identify Huawei transmission equipment. Thus, the NE IDs should be
configured when the DCN network uses the HWECC, IP over DCC, and OSI over DCC
protocols.
5.4 Planning the HWECC
For the HWECC, the data that supports the HWECC protocol is transmitted in the DCC. The
HWECC protocol, developed by Huawei, is a private communication protocol used for the DCN
networking of the optical equipment.
5.5 Planning the IP over DCC
For the IP over DCC, the data that supports the TCP/IP protocol is transmitted in the DCC.
5.6 Planning the OSI over DCC
For the OSI over DCC, the data that supports the OSI protocol is transmitted in the DCC.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 Planning the DCN Planning Guidelines

5.1 DCN Schemes Supported by the Equipment


In the SDH network, the T2000 communicates with NEs through the DCN, and thus the T2000
can manage and maintain the NEs. The NEs in the DCN use the DCC bytes to communicate
with each other. The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the HWECC, IP over DCC, and OSI over DCC
to construct the DCN.

The OptiX OSN 2500 can construct the DCN in the following ways:

l The HWECC protocol is used to transmit data through the DCC. It is a private
communication protocol developed by Huawei for the DCN networking of the optical
network equipment.
l The IP over DCC indicates that the data transmitted through the DCC supports the
transmission control protocol and internet protocol (TCP/IP).
l The OSI over DCC indicates that the data transmitted through the DCC supports the open
systems interconnection (OSI) protocol.

As listed in Table 5-1, the Q2CXL for the OptiX OSN 2500 has four DCC resource allocation
modes.The default mode is mode 1. Mode 1 does not support the use of D4–D12 bytes as physical
transmission channels.

Table 5-1 DCC resource allocation of the OptiX OSN 2500

DCC Allocation Q2CXL

Channel type Supports D1–D3 and D4–D12 channels.

Operation Mode 1 Only supports 40 D1–D3 channels.


mode
Mode 2 Supports 10 D1–D3 channels.
Supports 10 D4–D12 channels.

Mode 3 Supports 22 D1–D3 channels.


Supports 6 D4–D12 channels.

Mode 4 Supports 28 D1–D3 channels.


Supports 4 D4–D12 channels.

Default protocol type D1–D3 D4–D12

HWECC IP

Default mode Mode 1

NOTE

When the OptiX OSN 2500 forms a hybrid network with equipment from other vendors that does not
support the IP or OSI standard communication protocol, the hybrid network provides solutions of
transparent transmission through the DCC bytes and transparent transmission of the management
information through the Ethernet service channels.

5-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 5 Planning the DCN

5.2 Basic Principles


When constructing the DCN, select proper communication protocols according to the actual
networking situation, and follow the planning principles.

The principles for planning the DCN are as follows:

l When the OptiX OSN 2500 constructs a network with other Huawei equipment, the
HWECC or IP over DCC protocol is recommended. Use the same communication protocol
in the entire DCN network.
l When the OptiX OSN 2500 constructs a hybrid network with equipment from other
vendors, use the IP over DCC or OSI over DCC protocol according to the protocol
supported by the equipment from other vendors.
l The OptiX OSN 2500 constructs a hybrid network with equipment from other vendors. In
this case, if the equipment from other vendors do not support the IP over DCC or OSI over
DCC, use the DCC bytes or the Ethernet service channels to transparently transmit the
management information.
l When a communication protocol is used to construct the DCN network, properly set the
DCN network scale and divide the network according to the network situation. Thus, the
effect of large network scale on the DCN network can be reduced.
l The DCN network should be of the ring type to ensure the reliability of the network
communication. Thus, route protection can be provided when fiber cuts or NE
abnormalities occur. If fibers of the equipment cannot form a ring, extra DCN channels
should be constructed to form a ring, and thus the route protection function can be realized.

5.3 Planning NE IDs


NE IDs are used to identify Huawei transmission equipment. Thus, the NE IDs should be
configured when the DCN network uses the HWECC, IP over DCC, and OSI over DCC
protocols.

The principles for planning the NE IDs are as follows:

l The ID of each NE should be unique.


l In the same DCN network, the ID of each NE should be unique.
l An NE ID is 24 bits in binary, which can be divided into the former eight bits and the latter
16 bits.
– The former eight bits indicate the extended ID (the default value is 9), also called the
subnet number, which identifies different subnets. The subnet number cannot be 0 or
0xFF (255 in decimal).
– The latter 16 bits indicate the basic ID. The value of the basic ID cannot be 0 or 0xBFF0
(49136 in decimal), or be greater than 0xBFF0.
l In the ring network, the NE IDs should be increased one by one in the same direction along
the ring network.
l A complex network should be divided into rings and chains. First set IDs for NEs on the
ring from 1 to N, and then set the IDs for NEs on the chain as N+1, N+2,…

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 Planning the DCN Planning Guidelines

5.4 Planning the HWECC


For the HWECC, the data that supports the HWECC protocol is transmitted in the DCC. The
HWECC protocol, developed by Huawei, is a private communication protocol used for the DCN
networking of the optical equipment.
5.4.1 Capabilities of Supporting the HWECC
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the HWECC.
5.4.2 Planning Principles
When constructing the DCN by using the HWECC, follow the basic planning principles and
principles for planning the NE IDs, NE IP addresses, and gateway NEs.

5.4.1 Capabilities of Supporting the HWECC


The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the HWECC.

After the NE IDs in the network are set, the ECC communication is available without other
settings.

The HWECC of the OptiX OSN 2500 supports communication through fibers or Ethernet cables.
When no optical routes are available between nodes, set the extended ECC through Ethernet
cables.

5.4.2 Planning Principles


When constructing the DCN by using the HWECC, follow the basic planning principles and
principles for planning the NE IDs, NE IP addresses, and gateway NEs.

Basic Principles
The HWECC protocol is mainly used to construct the DCN between Huawei transmission
equipment. Adhere to the following principles when planning the HWECC.

l When the OptiX OSN 2500 or other Huawei OptiX OSN series equipment is used as the
gateway NE, there should be less than 100 NEs in each HWECC subnet. When the OptiX
10G (Metro5000) , OptiX 2500+ (Metro3000) is used as the gateway NE, there should be less
than 50 NEs in each HWECC subnet.
l The HWECC subnet should be of the ring type to ensure that the route protection is available
when fiber cuts or NE abnormalities occur.
l The ECC communication should not be performed between different HWECC subnets.
l The OptiX OSN 2500 automatically assigns ECC channels to each SDH board. As the
number of the ECC channels is restrained by the equipment, the unnecessary ECC channels
should be shut down.
l The number of nodes for each gateway NE is limited. Thus, when the number of nodes
exceeds the limit, mutiple gateway NEs can be configured.
l In normal situations, do not manually configure the ECC routes.
l When the extended ECC is required for communication, manually configure the extended
ECC. The ECC should not be automatically extended. Thus, the bandwidth between NEs,
which uses the ECC for communication, can be saved.

5-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 5 Planning the DCN

Principles for Plannig NE IDs


For details, see 5.3 Planning NE IDs.

Principles for Planning IP Addresses


The IP address is used for communication between gateway NEs and the T2000. Thus, the
gateway NEs should be configured with IP addresses. In addition, NEs that use the extended
ECC functions should be configured with IP addresses.
In normal situations, the IP addresses of NEs need not manually configured. The IP addresses
vary with the NE IDs. The format of the IP address is "129.E.A.B". "E" represents the extended
ID of the NE (The value is 9 by default), and "A.B" represents the former eight bits and the latter
eight bits. When the IP addresses are manually configured, the mapping relation between the IP
addresses and the IDs is unavailable.
By default, the subnet IP address is "129.9.0.0", and the subnet mask is "255.255.0.0".

Principles for Planning Gateway NEs


Adhere to the following principles when planning the gateway NEs.
l Correctly set the IP addresses and subnet masks for the gateway NEs.
l Only the equipment connected to the T2000 through cables can be configured as gateway
NEs.
l In actual networking, the traffic volume of the gateway NEs is large. NEs with large ECC
management abilities should be configured as gateway NEs to ensure stable
communication. In addition, gateway NEs should form a star network with other NEs to
reduce the traffic volume of other NEs.
l It is recommended that you select a standby gateway NE to ensure the stability of the
network connection. The standby gateway NE should meet the requirements for the active
gateway NE. In addition, the standby gateway NE can manage a portion of NEs, and the
active and standby gateway NEs mutually back up one another. Thus, the network stability
can be ensured.

5.5 Planning the IP over DCC


For the IP over DCC, the data that supports the TCP/IP protocol is transmitted in the DCC.
5.5.1 Capabilities of Supporting the IP over DCC
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the IP over DCC, which is realized by the TCP/IP protocol.
5.5.2 Planning Principles
When constructing the DCN by using the IP over DCC, follow the basic planning principles and
principles for planning the NE IDs and NE IP addresses.

5.5.1 Capabilities of Supporting the IP over DCC


The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the IP over DCC, which is realized by the TCP/IP protocol.
l The NEs can be accessed to the T2000 through the gateway NEs or be directly accessed to
the T2000.
l The TCP/IP application protocols, such as the FTP, Telnet, and SNMP, can be supported.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 Planning the DCN Planning Guidelines

l The open shortest path first (OSPF) dynamic routing protocol and static routing protocol
are supported.
Through the IP over DCC, the OptiX OSN 2500 can form a hybrid DCN network with equipment
from other vendors that supports the IP over DCC.

5.5.2 Planning Principles


When constructing the DCN by using the IP over DCC, follow the basic planning principles and
principles for planning the NE IDs and NE IP addresses.

Basic Principles
The IP over DCC is mainly used for managing the hybrid network composed of the OptiX OSN
2500 and equipment from other vendors that supports the IP over DCC. The IP over DCC is also
used for managing the network composed of Huawei transmission equipment. Adhere to the
following principles when planning the IP over DCC.
l In the same OSPF area, the number of NEs should not exceed 60.
l When the T2000 is used to manage the NEs, the number of non-gateway NEs accessed by
the same gateway NE should not exceed 60 (It is recommended that the number does not
exceed 50.)

Principles for Plannig NE IDs


For details, see 5.3 Planning NE IDs.

Principles for Planning IP Addresses


Adhere to the following principles when planning the IP addresses.
l The IP address of each NE should be unique.
l NEs can use the standard IP address types A, B, and C, in which the IP addresses of NEs
range from "1.0.0.1" to "223.255.255.254". However, the broadcast addresses, network
addresses and address "127.x.x.x" cannot be used. The subnet addresses "192.168.x.x" and
"192.169.x.x" cannot be used.
l The IP addresses should work with the subnet masks, and they should support subnet masks
that have variable length.
l When the NEs directly access the T2000 by using the static routing protocol, it is
recommended that the gateway NEs and non-gateway NEs use different IP subnets.
l If two networks are connected through the Ethernet, they should be in different IP subnets.
Thus, all NEs can be accessed through the T2000 when the network is divided into areas.

5.6 Planning the OSI over DCC


For the OSI over DCC, the data that supports the OSI protocol is transmitted in the DCC.
5.6.1 Capabilities of Supporting the OSI over DCC
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the OSI over DCC, which is realized by using the lower four
layers of protocols in the OSI standard seven-layer protocols.
5.6.2 Planning Principles

5-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 5 Planning the DCN

When constructing the DCN by using the OSI over DCC, follow the basic planning principles
and principles for planning the NE IDs, dividing network areas, selecting gateway NEs, and
configuring roles of the LAPD of optical interfaces.
5.6.3 Planning Cases
A case is given to show how to plan the address and node type, and how to select gateway NEs
in the DCN network areas.

5.6.1 Capabilities of Supporting the OSI over DCC


The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the OSI over DCC, which is realized by using the lower four
layers of protocols in the OSI standard seven-layer protocols.
l The OptiX OSN 2500 uses the format of the simple network service access point (NSAP)
address as the node protocol identification.
l The OptiX OSN 2500 supports three types of nodes, the end system (ES), level 1
Intermediate systems (L1-IS), and level 2 intermediate systems (L2-IS).
l The IS-IS protocol is used between ISs to dynamically exchange the routing information.
l The ES-IS protocol is used between the ES and the IS to perform the labor discovery and
to exchange the routing information.
l The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the IS-IS Level 2 protocol to realize route layering.
l The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the TP4 protocol.
l NEs can be accessed to the T2000 through the gateway NEs or be directly accessed to the
T2000.
Through the OSI over DCC, the OptiX OSN 2500 can form the hybrid DCN network with
equipment from other vendors that supports the OSI over DCC.

5.6.2 Planning Principles


When constructing the DCN by using the OSI over DCC, follow the basic planning principles
and principles for planning the NE IDs, dividing network areas, selecting gateway NEs, and
configuring roles of the LAPD of optical interfaces.

Basic Principles
The features of the OSI over DCC communication are mainly used for managing the hybrid
network constructed by the OptiX OSN 2500 and equipment from other vendors. When the
network is constructed only by Huawei transmission equipment, the OSI over DCC is not
recommended.
Only nodes at the network terminal can be configured as the ES. The functions of the ES routing
are limited, which prevents network expansion. Thus, it is not recommended that you configure
the equipment as the ES during the networking. Huawei T2000 is operating as a node of the ES
network.
By default, the L1-IS is the node type of Huawei equipment, which only supports the intra-area
routing (Level 1 Routing).
If the equipment supports the inter-area routing (Level 2 Routing), the node type of the network
should be configured as the L2-IS. The L2-IS maintains two routing tables. One of the two
routing tables is used for the intra-area routing, and the other is used for the inter-area routing.
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the IS-IS Level 2 routing functions. When the OSI
communication protocol is used, the network should be divided into areas according to the

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 Planning the DCN Planning Guidelines

network scale. In the entire DCN network, the number of areas cannot exceed 32. The number
of NEs in the same area cannot exceed 50.

The DCN network should be constructed as a ring network to provide route protection when
fiber cuts or NE abnormalities occur.

When the network is constructed by the OptiX OSN 2500 and equipment from other vendors,
the network planning should be based on the design principles for equipment from other vendors.

Principles for Plannig NE IDs


For details, see 5.3 Planning NE IDs.

Dividing Network Areas


The OSI protocol supports the functions of route layering. It uses the SYS ID to realize the intra-
area routing, and the AREA ID to realize the inter-area routing. When planning the DCN
network, properly divide the areas and assign the number of NEs in each area according to the
topology situation of the network.

In the case of a small-scale network with less than 50 NEs, there is no need to divide the network
into areas. In this case, set the node types of all NEs to the L1-IS, and set the same AREA ID to
the NSAPs of all NEs.

In the case of a large-scale network, divide the network according to the following principles:

l Divide the DCN network into multiple areas to facilitate management.


l In each area, select multiple NEs to function as the L2-IS. It is recommended that you select
two NEs that mutually back up each other, in each area.
l In the entire DCN network, all L2 equipment should be consecutive.

Selecting Gateway NEs


When the OSI over DCC is used to create the DCN, create the TP4 connection between the
T2000 and the gateway NEs. The management data transmitted by the T2000 to the non-gateway
NEs should be forwarded by the gateway NEs. When creating the gateway NEs on the T2000
interface, enter the NE IDs and specify the NSAP addresses. When creating the non-gateway
NEs, enter the NE IDs and specify their gateway NEs.

When all nodes in the DCN network are running the OSI protocol stack, it is recommended that
you do not create all NEs as the gateway NEs. Select a portion of nodes as the gateway NEs,
and create other NEs as the non-gateway NEs and specify their gateway NEs. Each gateway NE
should manage less than 64 non-gateway NEs to avoid overloading the gateway NEs and
reducing the overall T2000 system performance.

When selecting the gateway NEs, select the NEs close to the T2000 on the topology. Thus, less
overhead bytes are needed when the gateway NEs communicate with the T2000 and the
efficiency can be enhanced.

If route layering is supported when you divide the areas, select one NE or multiple NEs in each
area as the gateway NE or gateway NEs. When creating the non-gateway NEs, specify their
gateway NE in the local area.

Select a standby gateway NE for the non-gateway NEs to ensure the access reliability of the
T2000.

5-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 5 Planning the DCN

Configuring Roles of the LAPD of Optical Interfaces


When using the OSI protocol in the communication between optical interfaces, use the LAPD
protocol at the link layer realized by the optical interfaces. According to the requirements for
the LAPD protocol, set different roles for the LAPD at both the ends of the interconnected optical
interfaces.

There are two roles of the LAPD, "User" and "Network". The principle for setting the roles is
that the optical interfaces at the two ends interconnected through fibers should be set to different
roles. The optical interface at one end should be set to "User", and that at the other end should
be set to "Network".

5.6.3 Planning Cases


A case is given to show how to plan the address and node type, and how to select gateway NEs
in the DCN network areas.

Figure 5-1 shows that when the network is constructed by Huawei equipment and equipment
from other vendors, the OSI over DCC is used to construct the DCN network.

Figure 5-1 Planning of the DCN network in the OSI over DCC mode
ES
AREA ID: 391F1190

L1-IS
T2000
Level 1 Routing Area

L2-IS

OSI LAN
G GateWay
G
OSI
Level 2 Routing Area
DCN G

NE03
NE13
G G

NE02
G
G

NE01 AREA ID: 391F1210


NSAP:
AREA ID: 391F1200
391F120008003E0900011D

When planning the DCN network, divide the entire network into three areas. The AREA IDs
for the three areas are "391F1190", "391F1200", and "391F1210" (in hex). The equipment at
the core layer should be configured as the L2-IS, and the equipment at the edge layer should be
configured as the L1-IS. In addition, select NEs close to the T2000 on the topology as the gateway
NEs.

After the NE AREA ID and NE ID are configured, the NSAP address of an NE is determined
and it is unique. For example, the NSAP address of NE 01 is 391F120008003E0900011D.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
5 Planning the DCN Planning Guidelines

NOTE

As shown in Figure 5-1, the gateway NEs are the L2 equipment. However, this does not indicate that only
the L2 equipment can be gateway NEs. The L1 equipment can also be gateway NEs.

When the OSI protocol is used, the L2-IS nodes in the network should be consecutive. Thus,
when dividing areas, properly select the L2-IS nodes. As shown in Figure 5-1, NE 03 and NE
13 are configured as L1-ISs. In this case, the T2000 cannot manage NEs in AREA B and AREA
C, and the network communication is abnormal, because the L2 equipment is not consecutive.

5-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

6 Planning Services

About This Chapter

The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple types of services. For the OptiX OSN 2500, when
planning the services, consider the access capacity for different services and planning principles.

6.1 Basic Planning Principles


The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple services. When planning the services, follow the basic
principles.
6.2 Maximum Service Access Capacity
For the OptiX OSN 2500, the maximum service access capacity, access capacity of slots, and
cross-connect capacity of slots are defined.
6.3 Planning SDH Services
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple SDH services. When planning the SDH services, follow
the basic principles.
6.4 Planning Long-Haul Optical Transmission
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the long-haul optical transmission. When planning the long-haul
optical transmission, follow the basic principles.
6.5 Planning PDH Services
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple PDH services. When planning the PDH services, follow
the basic principles.
6.6 Planning Ethernet Services
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple Ethernet services. When planning the Ethernet services,
follow the basic principles and choose proper principles according to the actual network
situation.
6.7 Planning RPR Services
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple RPR services. When planning the RPR services, follow
the basic principles and choose proper principles according to the actual network situation.
6.8 Planning ATM and IMA Services
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple ATM and IMA services. When planning the ATM and
IMA services, follow the basic principles.
6.9 Planning SAN and Video Services

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple SAN and video services. When planning the SAN and
video services, follow the basic principles and choose proper principles according to the actual
network situation.
6.10 Planning DDN Services
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple types of DDN services. When planning the DDN
services, follow the basic principles.
6.11 Planning WDM Services
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple types of WDM services. When planning the WDM
services for different WDM boards, follow different principles.

6-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

6.1 Basic Planning Principles


The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple services. When planning the services, follow the basic
principles.
l Analyze the service requirements.
l Consider the service requirements that can be met in a transmission network.
l Determine the proper schemes for providing services. The following factors should be
considered:
– Valid slots for service boards
– Service routes
– Aligning sequence of services in a VC-4
l Determine the shortest route for the service and align the services, in sequence, in the VC-4.
l Determine the interface types for services.
l Check for the available network resources when planning new services for the existing
network. The available resources involve the higher order cross-connection resources,
lower order cross-connection resources and VC-4 paths.
l Consider the capability of the network and the equipment in the network of supporting
future services.

6.2 Maximum Service Access Capacity


For the OptiX OSN 2500, the maximum service access capacity, access capacity of slots, and
cross-connect capacity of slots are defined.

6.2.1 Service Access Capacity


The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 2500 can access varies with the type and quantity
of the configured boards.
6.2.2 Slot Access Capacity
With different cross-connect boards, the OptiX OSN 2500 provides different slot access
capacity.
6.2.3 Cross-Connect Capacity
The Q2CXL1, Q2CXL4 and Q2CXL16 have the same cross-connect capacity.

6.2.1 Service Access Capacity


The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 2500 can access varies with the type and quantity
of the configured boards.
Table 6-1 lists the maximum capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 for accessing different services.
The maximum capacity refers to the maximum number of services that is supported, when only
one specific type of service is accessed.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

Table 6-1 Maximum service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500
Service Type Maximum Number of Services
Supported by a Single Subrack

STM-16 standard or concatenated services 6

STM-16 (FEC) services 4

STM-4 standard or concatenated services 24

STM-1 standard services 74

STM-1 (electrical) services 38

E4 services 16

E3/T3 services 57

E1/T1 services 252

FE services 88

GE services 28

STM-4 ATM services 7

STM-1 ATM services 28

ESCON services 20

FICON/FC100 services 9

FC200 services 4

DVB-ASI services 20

N x 64 kbit/s services (N: 1–31) 32

Framed E1 services 32

6.2.2 Slot Access Capacity


With different cross-connect boards, the OptiX OSN 2500 provides different slot access
capacity.
Slots 5, 6 and 7 in the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack can be divided into half-height slots as required.
Figure 6-1 shows the access capacity of each slot when the three slots are not divided. Figure
6-2 shows the access capacity of each slot when the three slots are divided.

6-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Figure 6-1 Access capacity of each slot before division of the three slots

S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L
S S S S
S S S S O O O O O O O O O O
L L L L
L L L L T T T T T T T T T T
O O O O
O O O O 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
T T T T
T T T T
1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 S
5 6 7 8

1.25Gbit/s
622Mbit/s
622Mbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
A
P

Fiber Routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
SLOT22 SLOT24 SLOT25 SLOT23

Figure 6-2 Access capacity of each slot after division of the three slots
S S S
1 2 2
9 0 1
S S S S S S S
1.25Gbit/s
622Mbit/s
622Mbit/s

L L L L L L L
S S S S
S S S S O O O O O O O
L L L L
L L L L T T T T T T T
O O O O
O O O O 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
T T T T
T T T T S S S
1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 S
5 6 7 8
1.25Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s

A
1.25Gbit/s
622Mbit/s
622Mbit/s

Fiber Routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
SLOT22 SLOT24 SLOT25 SLOT23

6.2.3 Cross-Connect Capacity


The Q2CXL1, Q2CXL4 and Q2CXL16 have the same cross-connect capacity.
Table 6-2 lists the cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

Table 6-2 Cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500

Cross-Connect Higher Order Cross- Lower Order Access Capacity


and Connect Capacity Cross-Connect
Synchronous Capacity
Timing Board

Q2CXL1 20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 18.75 Gbit/s (120 x
VC-4) VC-4) 120 VC-4)

Q2CXL4 20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 18.75 Gbit/s (120 x
VC-4) VC-4) 120 VC-4)

Q2CXL16 20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 18.75 Gbit/s (120 x
VC-4) VC-4) 120 VC-4)

6.3 Planning SDH Services


The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple SDH services. When planning the SDH services, follow
the basic principles.
6.3.1 Capability of Supporting SDH Services
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the SDH standard services, SDH standard concatenation services,
and SDH services with FEC.
6.3.2 Planning Principles
Adhere to the following principles when planning SDH services.

6.3.1 Capability of Supporting SDH Services


The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the SDH standard services, SDH standard concatenation services,
and SDH services with FEC.
l SDH standard services: STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16.
l SDH standard concatenation services: VC-4-4c, VC-4-8c and VC-4-16c.
l SDH services with FEC: 2.666 Gbit/s.

Table 6-3 lists the SDH boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features.

Table 6-3 SDH boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type

N1SL16, Interfaces available on L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je


N2SL16, the front panel
N3SL16

N1SL16A, Interfaces available on I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2


N2SL16A, the front panel
N3SL16A

N1SF16 Interfaces available on Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f


the front panel

6-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type

N1SLQ4 Interfaces available on I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2


the front panel

N2SLQ4 Interfaces available on I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2


the front panel

N1SLD4 Interfaces available on I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2


the front panel

N2SLD4 Interfaces available on I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2


the front panel

N1SL4 Interfaces available on I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2


the front panel

N2SL4 Interfaces available on I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2


the front panel

N1SLT1 Interfaces available on S-1.1


the front panel

N1SLQ1 Interfaces available on I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2


the front panel

N2SLQ1 Interfaces available on I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2


the front panel

N1SL1 Interfaces available on I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2


the front panel

N2SL1 Interfaces available on I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2


the front panel

R1SLD4 Interfaces available on I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2


the front panel

R1SL4 Interfaces available on I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2


the front panel

R1SLQ1 Interfaces available on I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2


the front panel

R1SL1 Interfaces available on I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2


the front panel

N1SEP1a Interfaces available on 75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical interface


the front panel

N1SEPb 4 x STM-1 line 75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface


processing board:
N1EU04

8 x STM-1 line I-1, S-1.1 electrical interface


processing board:
N1OU08

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type

8 x STM-1 line I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1 electrical interface


processing board:
N2OU08

8 x STM-1 line 75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface


processing board:
N1EU08

N2SLO1 Interfaces available on I-1.1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2


the front panel

Q2CXL16c Interfaces available on I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2


the front panel

Q2CXL4c Interfaces available on I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2


the front panel

Q2CXL1c Interfaces available on I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2


the front panel

a: The N1SEP1 and N1SEP are the boards of the same type. When they are used with the
interface board, they are displayed as "N1SEP" on the T2000. When they provide interfaces
on the front panel, they are displayed as "N1SEP1" on the T2000.
b: The N1SEP can be used with the N1TSB8 or the N1TSB4 board to realize the TPS
protection.
c: The Q2CXL is a board that integrates the line, SCC, cross-connect, and timing units for
the OptiX OSN 2500. It is housed in slot 9 and slot 10. On the T2000, it is displayed as three
board types: ECXL, GSCC and SL1/4/16, respectively seated in the logical slots 80–81, 82–
83 and 9–10.

6.3.2 Planning Principles


Adhere to the following principles when planning SDH services.
l Choose proper SDH processing boards according to the interface rate and interface quantity.
l Choose proper optical modules according to the distance among nodes in the network and
the attenuation. Proper optical modules must be used to avoid that the received optical
power is lower than the receiver sensitivity or overload optical power. For details on
technical specifications of the SDH processing boards, refer to Chapter 11 "Technical
Specifications" in the OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product
Description.
l The SLT1 board is mainly used to access local services or to extend links. The SLT1 can
also provide line interfaces, but this is not the main function of the SLT1.
l If the N1SEP1 is configured as SEP1 on the T2000, services can be accessed only from the
two electrical interfaces on the front panel. When the N1SEP1 is configured as SEP, the
EU08 or OU08 interface board should be used to access eight channels of electrical or
optical interfaces, or the EU04 interface board should be used to access four channels of
electrical interfaces.

6-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

l Used with the EU08 or EU04, the SEP accesses and processes STM-1 electrical signals.
Used with the TSB8 or TSB4, the SLH1 can be configured with the TPS protection.
l When the SEP board is used, an interface board is required. The interface board should be
housed in the slot exclusive for the processing board.

6.4 Planning Long-Haul Optical Transmission


The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the long-haul optical transmission. When planning the long-haul
optical transmission, follow the basic principles.
6.4.1 Capability of Supporting Long-Haul Optical Transmission
When an optical booster amplifier unit and a dispersion compensation board are used, the OptiX
OSN 2500 can realize the long-haul transmission of optical signals.
6.4.2 Planning Principles
The BA2, BPA or external COA can be used as an optical booster amplifier board. Among these
three types of boards, the BA2 or BPA is recommended.

6.4.1 Capability of Supporting Long-Haul Optical Transmission


When an optical booster amplifier unit and a dispersion compensation board are used, the OptiX
OSN 2500 can realize the long-haul transmission of optical signals.

Table 6-4 lists the optical booster amplifier units for the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features.

Table 6-4 Optical booster amplifier units for the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features

Board Board Description Input Optical Output Optical Power


Power (dBm) (dBm)

BA2 Dual-path optical –6 to +3 +14.5 or +17.5


booster amplifier board

BPA Optical booster amplifier BA: –6 to +3 BA: +14.5 or +17.5


and pre-amplifier board PA: –10 to –38 PA gain: 22 dB
(optical signals at
the rate of 2.5 Gbit/
s or lower) or –10 to
–27 (optical signals
at the rate of 10
Gbit/s)

61COA Case-shaped erbium –6 to +3 +14.5 or +17.5


fiber optical amplifier
unit

N1COA Case-shaped signal-path –10 to –38 (optical Gain: 22 dB


optical pre-amplifier unit signals at the rate of
2.5 Gbit/s or less) or
–10 to –28 (optical
signals at the rate of
10 Gbit/s)

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

Board Board Description Input Optical Output Optical Power


Power (dBm) (dBm)

62COA Case-shaped Raman –39 to –20 (2.5 Max. switch gain: 15 dB


optical amplifier unit Gbit/s optical Max. valid gain: 13 dB
signals without
FEC)

ROP Remote optical pumping - 30 dB optical pumping


unit power

N1FIB Filter and isolating board - -


(passive and used with
the ROP)

TN11OBU1 Optical booster amplifier –32 to –4 (OBU1- –12 to +16 (OBU1-C01) or


board C01) or –32 to –3 –9 to +20 (OBU1-C01)
(OBU1-C02)

Table 6-5 lists the dispersion compensation units for the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features.

Table 6-5 Dispersion compensation units for the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features

Board Board Description Dispersion Compensation Insertion Loss


(ps/nm) (dB)

N1DCU Dispersion compensation 1020 (60 km) < 8.3


unit 1360 (80 km)

N2DCU Dispersion compensation 680 (40 km) <3


unit 1020 (60 km)
1360 (80 km)

The insertion loss of the N2DCU is 3 to 5 dB less than that of the N1DCU.

6.4.2 Planning Principles


The BA2, BPA or external COA can be used as an optical booster amplifier board. Among these
three types of boards, the BA2 or BPA is recommended.

Generally, the BA2, BPA or DCU should be used with a long-distance optical transmission
module to realize long-distance transmission without electrical regeneration. Adhere to the
following principles when planning optical booster amplifier boards:

l Use a BA2 with the optical transmission module, whose interfaces are of the V-16.2Je type.
l Use a BA2 and a BPA with the optical transmission module, whose interfaces are of the
U-16.2Je type.
l Use a BA2 and a BPA with the optical transmission module, whose interfaces are of the
Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d or Ue-16.2f type.

6-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Using the COA, the OptiX OSN 2500 can transmit optical signals for a distance from 80 to 200
km.

The ROP unit is used to amplify 2.5 Gbit/s optical signals and to transmit optical signals of 1550-
nm wavelength for a long distance (70 dB). If the fiber attenuation is 0.2 dB/km, the optical
signals can be transmitted for 350 km without regeneration.

The ROP unit can also be used to amplify 2.5Gbit/s optical signals.

If the FIB is jointly used with the ROP to filter wavelengths and isolate the optical signals from
the ROP to the optical receive equipment.

6.5 Planning PDH Services


The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple PDH services. When planning the PDH services, follow
the basic principles.
6.5.1 Capability of Supporting PDH Services
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the E1/T1, E3/T3, and E4 services.
6.5.2 Planning Principles
Choose proper PDH processing boards and interface boards according to the actual service types.
Configure the TPS protection for the PDH processing boards as required.

6.5.1 Capability of Supporting PDH Services


The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the E1/T1, E3/T3, and E4 services.

Table 6-6 lists the PDH boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features.

Table 6-6 PDH boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features

Board Full Name Valid Interfacing Interface Type


Slots Mode

N1SPQ4 4 x E4/STM-1 Slots 6–7, Interfaces 75-ohm E4/STM-1


processing board 12–13 available on the electrical interface
interface board

N2SPQ4 4 x E4/STM-1 Slots 6–7, Interfaces 75-ohm E4/STM-1


processing board 12–13 available on the electrical interface
interface board

N1PD3 6 x E3/T3 processing Slots 6–7, Interfaces 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical


board 12–13 available on the interface
interface board

N1PL3 3 x E3/T3 processing Slots 6–7, Interfaces 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical


board 12–13 available on the interface
interface board

N1PL3 3 x E3/T3 processing Slots 5–8, Interfaces 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical


A board 11–13 available on the interface
front panel

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

Board Full Name Valid Interfacing Interface Type


Slots Mode

N2PQ3 12 x E3/T3 Slots 6–7, Interfaces 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical


processing board 12–13 available on the interface
interface board

N2PD3 6 x E3/T3 processing Slots 6–7, Interfaces 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical


board 12–13 available on the interface
interface board

N2PL3 3 x E3/T3 processing Slots 6–7, Interfaces 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical


board 12–13 available on the interface
interface board

N2PL3 3 x E3/T3 processing Slots 5–8, Interfaces 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical


A board 11–13 available on the interface
front panel

N1PQ1 63 x E1 processing Slots 5–7, Interfaces 75-ohm E1 interface


A board 12–13 available on the
interface board

N1PQ1 63 x E1 processing Slots 5–7, Interfaces 120-ohm E1 interface


B board 12–13 available on the
interface board

N1PQM 63 x T1/E1 Slots 5–7, Interfaces 120-ohm E1 interface,


processing board 12–13 available on the 100-ohm T1 interface
interface board

N2PQ1 63 x E1 processing Slots 5–7, Interfaces 75-ohm E1 interface


A board 12–13 available on the
interface board

N2PQ1 63 x E1 processing Slots 5–7, Interfaces 120-ohm E1 interface,


B board 12–13 available on the 100-ohm T1 interface
interface board

R1PD1 32 x E1 processing Slots 5–7, Interfaces 75-ohm E1 interface


A board (half-height) 19–21 available on the
interface board

R1PD1 32 x E1 processing Slots 5–7, Interfaces 120-ohm E1 interface


B board (half-height) 19–21 available on the
interface board

R2PD1 32 x E1 processing Slots 5–7, Interfaces 75-ohm E1 interface


A board (half-height) 19–21 available on the
interface board

R2PD1 32 x E1 processing Slots 5–7, Interfaces 120-ohm E1 interface,


B board (half-height) 19–21 available on the 100-ohm T1 interface
interface board

6-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

6.5.2 Planning Principles


Choose proper PDH processing boards and interface boards according to the actual service types.
Configure the TPS protection for the PDH processing boards as required.

6.6 Planning Ethernet Services


The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple Ethernet services. When planning the Ethernet services,
follow the basic principles and choose proper principles according to the actual network
situation.
6.6.1 Capability of Supporting Ethernet Services
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports four types of Ethernet services, including EPL, EVPL, EPLAN,
and EVPLAN.
6.6.2 Planning Principles
When planning the Ethernet services, follow the basic principles and select the corresponding
service types according to the actual network situation.
6.6.3 Planning Transparently Transmitted EPL Services
The transparently transmitted EPL services can be used to plan the Ethernet services.
6.6.4 Planning Port-Shared EPL Services
The port-shared EPL services can be used to plan the Ethernet services.
6.6.5 Planning VCTRUNK-Shared EPL Services
The VCTRUNK-shared EPL services can be used to plan the Ethernet services.
6.6.6 Planning VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services
The VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services can be used to plan the Ethernet services.
6.6.7 Planning EVPL Services (Transmit Scheme)
The EVPL services (Transmit Scheme) can be used to plan the Ethernet services.
6.6.8 Planning EPLAN Services
The EPLAN services can be used to plan the Ethernet services.
6.6.9 Planning EVPLAN Services
The EVPLAN services can be used to plan the Ethernet services.

6.6.1 Capability of Supporting Ethernet Services


The OptiX OSN 2500 supports four types of Ethernet services, including EPL, EVPL, EPLAN,
and EVPLAN.

The OptiX OSN 2500 provides several types of the Ethernet processing boards to support
different Ethernet services. Table 6-7, Table 6-8, Table 6-9 and Table 6-10 lists the Ethernet
processing boards.

Table 6-7 Features of the N1EFS4, N2EFS4, N1EFS0, N2EFS0 and N4EFS0 boards

Function N1EFS4 N2EFS4 N1EFS0 N2EFS0 N4EFS0

Interface 4 FE 4 FE 8 FE 8 FE 8 FE

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

Function N1EFS4 N2EFS4 N1EFS0 N2EFS0 N4EFS0

Interface 10Base-T, 10Base-T, 10Base-T, 10Base-T, 10Base-T,


type 100Base-TX 100Base-TX 100Base-TX, 100Base- 100Base-TX,
100Base-FX TX, 100Base-FX
100Base-FX

Interface None None N1ETF8, N1ETS8 N1ETS8


board N1EFF8 (cooperating (cooperating
with TSB8 to with TSB8 to
realize 1:1 realize 1:1
TPS), TPS),
N1ETF8, N1ETF8,
N1EFF8 N1EFF8

Service Ethernet II, Ethernet II, Ethernet II, Ethernet II, Ethernet II,
frame IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3,
format IEEE 802.1 IEEE 802.1 q/ IEEE 802.1 q/ IEEE 802.1 IEEE 802.1
q/p p p q/p q/p

JUMBO Supported, Supported, Supported, Supported, Supported,


frame 9600 bytes 9600 bytes 9600 bytes 9600 bytes 9600 bytes

Uplink 4 VC-4 8 VC-4 4 VC-4 8 VC-4 8 VC-4


bandwidth

Mapping VC-12, VC-12, VC-12, VC-12, VC-12,


mode VC-3, VC-3, VC-3, VC-3, VC-3,
VC-12-xv (x VC-12-xv (x VC-12-xv (x VC-12-xv (x VC-12-xv (x
≤63), VC-3- ≤63), VC-3- ≤63), VC-3- ≤63), ≤63), VC-3-
xv (x≤12) xv (x≤12) xv (x≤12) VC-3-xv (x xv (x≤12)
≤12)

Number of 12 24 12 24 24
VCTRUN
Ks

Ethernet Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported


private line
(EPL)

Ethernet Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported


virtual
private line
(EVPL)

Ethernet Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported


private
LAN
(EPLAN)

6-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Function N1EFS4 N2EFS4 N1EFS0 N2EFS0 N4EFS0

Ethernet Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported


virtual
private
LAN
(EVPLAN
)

Static MartinioE MartinioE MartinioE MartinioE MartinioE


MPLS label label label label label
label supported supported supported supported supported

Stack Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported


VLAN

VLAN IEEE 802.1q/ IEEE 802.1q/ IEEE 802.1q/ IEEE IEEE 802.1q/
p p p 802.1q/p p

RSTP Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Multicast Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported


listening
(IGMP
Snooping)

Encapsulat Generic GFP GFP GFP GFP


ion framing
procedure
(GFP)

Link state Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported


pass
through
(LPT)

Link ITU-T G. ITU-T G. ITU-T G. ITU-T G. ITU-T G.


capacity 7042 7042 7042 7042 7042
adjustment
scheme
(LCAS)

Committed Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s)


access rate
(CAR)

Flow IEEE 802.3X IEEE 802.3X IEEE 802.3X IEEE IEEE 802.3X
control 802.3X

Intra-board Not Supported Not Supported Supported


port supported supported
aggregatio
n

Test frame Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

Function N1EFS4 N2EFS4 N1EFS0 N2EFS0 N4EFS0

Ethernet Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported


performan
ce
monitoring

Table 6-8 Features of the N1EGS2 and N2EGS2 boards


Function N1EGS2 N2EGS2

Interface 2 GE 2 GE

Interface type 1000Base-SX, 1000Base- 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX,


LX, 1000Base-ZX 1000Base-ZX

Interface board None None

Service frame format Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1
802.1 q/p q/p

JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes Supported, 9600 bytes

Uplink bandwidth 8 VC-4 16 VC-4

Mapping mode VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-xv (x≤ VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-xv (x≤63),
63), VC-3-xv (x≤12) VC-3-xv (x≤12)

Number of 24 48
VCTRUNKs

EPL Supported Supported

EVPL Supported Supported

EPLAN Supported Supported

EVPLAN Not supported Supported

Static MPLS label Not supported MartinioE label supported

Stack VLAN Not supported Supported

VLAN IEEE 802.1q/p IEEE 802.1q/p

RSTP Not supported Supported

Multicast listening Not supported Supported


(IGMP Snooping)

Encapsulation GFP GFP

LPT Supported Supported

LCAS Not supported ITU-T G.7042

CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s)

6-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Function N1EGS2 N2EGS2

Flow control IEEE 802.3X IEEE 802.3X

Intra-board port Supported Supported


aggregation

Test frame Supported Supported

Ethernet Supported Supported


performance
monitoring

Table 6-9 Features of the N1EGT2, N1EFT8, N1EFT8A and R1EFT4 boards
Function N1EGT2 N1EFT8 N1EFT8A R1EFT4

Interface 2 GE 16 FE 8 FE 4 FE

Interface type 1000Base- 10Base-T, 10Base-T, 10Base-T,


SX, 100Base-TX, 100Base-TX 100Base-TX
1000Base- 100Base-FX
LX,
1000Base-
ZX

Interface board None Supports 8 x FE None None


if not used with
an interface
board.
Supports 16 x FE
if used with
interface boards
N1ETF8 and
N1EFF8.

Service frame Ethernet II, Ethernet II, Ethernet II, IEEE Ethernet II,
format IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3, 802.3, IEEE IEEE 802.3,
IEEE IEEE 802.1QTAG IEEE
802.1QTAG 802.1QTAG 802.1QTAG

JUMBO frame Supported, Supported, 9600 Supported by the Supported, 9600


9600 bytes bytes latter four ports, bytes
9600 bytes

Uplink 16 VC-4 8 VC-4 4 VC-4 4 VC-4


bandwidth

Mapping mode VC-3, VC-4, VC-12, VC-3, VC-12, VC-3, VC-12, VC-3,
VC-3-xv (x VC-12-xv (x≤ VC-12-xv (x≤ VC-12-xv (x≤
≤24), 63), VC-3-xv (x 63), VC-3-xv (x≤ 63), VC-3-xv (x
VC-4-xv (x ≤3) 3) ≤3)
≤8)

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

Function N1EGT2 N1EFT8 N1EFT8A R1EFT4

Number of 2 16 8 4
VCTRUNKs

Ethernet service Only EPL Only EPL Only EPL Only EPL
types supported; supported; supported; EVPL, supported;
EVPL, EVPL, EPLAN EPLAN and EVPL, EPLAN
EPLAN and and EVPLAN EVPLAN not and EVPLAN
EVPLAN not supported supported not supported
not
supported

MPLS Not Not supported Not supported Not supported


supported

VLAN Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent


transmission transmission transmission transmission

Encapsulation GFP, LAPS, GFP, LAPS, GFP, LAPS, GFP, LAPS,


HDLC HDLC HDLC HDLC

LPT Not Not supported Not supported Not supported


supported

LCAS ITU-T G. ITU-T G.7042 ITU-T G.7042 ITU-T G.7042


7042

CAR Not supported

Flow control IEEE IEEE 802.3X IEEE 802.3X IEEE 802.3X


802.3X

Test frame Supported Supported Supported Supported

Ethernet Supported Supported Supported Supported


performance
monitoring

Table 6-10 Features of the EMS4 and EGS4 boards


Function N1EMS4 N1EGS4, N3EGS4

Interface 4 GE and 16 FE 4 GE

Interface type 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-


1000Base-ZX, 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, LX, 1000Base-ZX
100Base-FX

Interface board Supports 4 x GE if not used with an None


interface board.
Supports 4 x GE and 16 x FE if used with
interface boards N1ETF8 and N1EFF8.

6-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Function N1EMS4 N1EGS4, N3EGS4

Protection Supports 1+1 intra-board protection and port level protection.

Service frame Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p


format

JUMBO frame Supported, 9216 bytes

Uplink bandwidth 16 VC-4

Mapping mode VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv (x≤24), VC-4-xv
(x≤8)

Number of 64
VCTRUNKs

EPL Supported

EVPL Supports VLAN-based and QinQ-based EVPL services.

EPLAN Supported

EVPLAN Supported

Static MPLS label Not supported

VLAN Supports VLAN and QinQ.Supports the adding, deletion and exchange
of VLAN labels, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p.

RSTP Supported

Multicast listening Supported


(IGMP Snooping)

Encapsulation GFP, LAPS, HDLC

LPT Supported

LCAS ITU-T G.7042

CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s)

QoS traffic Supports port flow and port+VLAN flow.


classification

CoS Supported

Shaping Supported

Flow control Supports IEEE 802.3X compliant flow control, based on GE/FE port.

Ethernet Supported
performance
monitoring

Ethernet OAM Supported

Test frame Supported

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

Function N1EMS4 N1EGS4, N3EGS4

Service mirroring Not supported

Link aggregation Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation.

6.6.2 Planning Principles


When planning the Ethernet services, follow the basic principles and select the corresponding
service types according to the actual network situation.

Basic Planning Principles


Adhere to the following principles when planning Ethernet services:

l Use the N1EGT2, N1EFT8 or N1EFT8A for Ethernet services that require only transparent
transmission. Use the N1EFS4, N2EFS4, N1EFS0, N2EFS0, N4EFS0, N1EMS4,
N1EGS4, N3EGS4 or N2EGS2 for services that require the Layer 2 switching and shared
bandwidth.
l The Ethernet data frames should be encapsulated before being accessed into an SDH
network. The connected Ethernet boards should encapsulate data frames in the same format.
For example, the Ethernet boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 that encapsulate data frames in
the GFP, LAPS or HDLC format cannot be connected to the ET1 board of the OptiX 2500
+(Metro3000) that encapsulate data frames in the ML-PPP format.
l The Ethernet boards have GE and FE optical interfaces. Optical interfaces of the same type
should be used to connect Ethernet processing boards.
l Choose a proper optical module for the Ethernet board with GE optical interfaces according
to the transmission distance.
l If an Ethernet processing board is used with an interface board, more optical interfaces are
available.
l Set LCAS, CAR and flow control for the Ethernet services as required.
l Apply different protection schemes according to the boards used:
– Configure TPS protection for the N2EFS0 and N4EFS0.
– Configure BPS protection for the N1EGS4, N3EGS4 and N1EMS4.
– Configure PPS protection also for the N1EGS4, N3EGS4 and N1EMS4.

Selection of Service Types


Ethernet services are of four types, which are EPL, EVPL, EPLAN and EVPLAN.

Ⅰ. EPL service

l The EPL service can be used in three schemes:


– Scheme Ι: transparent transmission EPL
– Scheme Ⅱ: port-shared EPL
– Scheme Ш: VCTRUNK-shared EPL

6-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

l If scheme Ι is applied, the EPL service uses the line bandwidth exclusively and is isolated
from other services. Hence, the EPL service is of higher security. This scheme for EPL
services can be used for private lines of key customers.
l If scheme Ⅱ or scheme Ш is applied, the point-to-multipoint transmission of Ethernet
services is realized. By identifying VLAN tags, several EPL services can share the same
port or VCTRUNK. As a result, the port resources are saved. The services of different users
share the bandwidth and content for bandwidth in a fair manner. Such a scheme is applicable
if users require large-volume services at different time.
Ⅱ. EVPL service
l The VLAN IDs and MPLS tags can be used to isolate the EVPL services of different users
or the EVPL services of different departments in the same company. In this way, the data
of the same VLAN in the same link is isolated.
l Ingress and Egress indicate two operations performed to the label switch path (LSP). Ingress
indicates that the MPLS label is added and Egress indicates that the MPLS label is stripped.
When the EVPL services enter a network, the Ingress operation is performed. When the
EVPL services exit a network, the Egress operation is performed. This is a typical
application of the EVPL service.
l The EVPL service can be applied in the Transit scheme to transparently transmit and
forward the MPLS data packets.
l The transmission efficiency of the EVPL service is low and complex configuration is
required. As a result, use the EPL service instead of the EVPL service unless the EPL
service is required.
Ш. EPLAN service
l The EPLAN services can dynamically share the bandwidth at multiple points. As a result,
the EPLAN service is in line with the dynamic feature of data services and the bandwidth
resources are saved.
l The configured EPLAN service should not form a ring. Otherwise, a broadcast storm is
caused. If the EPLAN service is configured into a ring, the RSTP protocol should be enabled
in the network to avoid broadcast storms.
Ⅳ. EVPLAN service
l The VLAN IDs and MPLS labels can be used to isolate the EVPLAN services of different
users or the EVPLAN services of different departments in the same company.
l The EVPLAN services can dynamically share the bandwidth at multiple points. Different
from the EPLAN service, the EVPLAN service requires that any two nodes in the network
be connected by an LSP to form a mesh network. In addition, the service features help
prevent broadcast storms effectively.
l The MPLS technology is applied for the EVPLAN service. As a result, the transmission
efficiency is lower than that of the EPLAN service and the configuration is more complex.
Use the EPLAN service to meet the service requirements unless the EVPLAN service is
specifically required.

6.6.3 Planning Transparently Transmitted EPL Services


The transparently transmitted EPL services can be used to plan the Ethernet services.

Service Requirement
Company A and company B at NE 1 need to transmit data services respectively to company A
and company B at NE 2. It is required that services of company A and company B are totally

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-21


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

isolated from each other. Both company A and company B provide 100M Ethernet electrical
interfaces. Company A requires 10M bandwidth and company B requires 45M bandwidth.

Networking Application
Services of company A and company B are required to be transparently transmitted between NE
1 and NE 2. Two OptiX OSN 2500 systems can be used as NE 1 and NE 2. Figure 6-3 shows
the networking diagram.

Figure 6-3 Networking diagram for transparently transmitted EPL services


B B
PORT2 VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK2 PORT2

PORT1 POTR1
VCTRUNK 1 VCTRUNK 1
A
A

NE 1 NE 2

OptiX OSN Enterprise


equipment user

At NE 1, services from company A and company B are accessed respectively from Ethernet
ports. At NE 2, services from company A and company B are also respectively accessed from
Ethernet ports.

In the line, the EPL service from company A is carried by one VCTRUNK and the EPL service
from company B is carried by another VCTRUNK.

Application Scheme
Use the port routing scheme for the transparently transmitted EPL services.

Hardware Configuration
Configure one EFS4 for NE 1 and NE 2 to access Ethernet services from company A and
company B respectively.

Service Route
Table 6-11 lists the service routes.

Table 6-11 Service routes for the transparently transmitted EPL services

Route NE 1 NE 2
Location

Company A Port 1←→VCTRUNK 1 VCTRUNK 1←→Port 1


(NE 1←→NE
2) Five VC-12s are bound in VCTRUNK 1.

6-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Route NE 1 NE 2
Location

Company B Port 2←→VCTRUNK 2 VCTRUNK 2←→Port 2


(NE 1←→NE
2) One VC-3 is bound in VCTRUNK 2.

6.6.4 Planning Port-Shared EPL Services


The port-shared EPL services can be used to plan the Ethernet services.

Service Requirement
The headquarters of company A is located at NE 1 and two departments are located at NE 2.
The headquarters need to communicate with the two branches. The two departments should be
isolated from each other and should each use 10M bandwidth. The Ethernet switch of company
A provides 100M Ethernet electrical interfaces and the Ethernet switch at the headquarters
supports the VLAN.

Networking Application
Services from the two departments are transmitted to the headquarters at NE 1 and are then
converged. Services from the headquarters are also transmitted to the two departments at NE 2.
The OptiX OSN 2500 equipment can be used to meet the service requirement. Figure 6-4 shows
the networking diagram.

Figure 6-4 Networking diagram for port-shared EPL services


Department 1

VCTRUNK 1 VCTRUNK 1
Headquarters PORT1 POTR1
of company A VCTRUNK2 VCTRUNK 2 PORT2

Department 2

NE 1 NE 2

OptiX OSN
Enterpris
equipment
e user

Application Scheme
Use the port+VLAN as the routing scheme for the port-shared EPL services. Figure 6-5 shows
the details.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-23


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

Figure 6-5 Application scheme for port-shared EPL services


Department 1
Headquarters of
company A VLAN100
VCTRUNK1
VLAN100 PORT1
VCTRUNK2 VLAN200
VLAN200
PORT2
PORT1
Department 2

NE 1 NE 2

OptiX OSN
Enterprise
equipment
user

In the converging direction, at NE 2, services of the two departments are accessed from Ethernet
ports of NE 2 and then are added with VLAN tags (VLAN ID: 100 and 200). The services are
transmitted by one VCTRUNK respectively to NE 1. The services are converged at NE 1 and
are then output from one Ethernet port.
In the distributing direction, the Ethernet processing board of NE 1 processes the services (VLAN
ID: 100 and 200) from the headquarters of company A. The Ethernet processing board of NE 1
then uses different VCTRUNKs to distribute the respective services to the two departments at
NE 2.

Hardware Configuration
Configure one EFS4 for NE 1 and NE 2 to access Ethernet services from the headquarters and
departments of company A respectively.

Service Route
Table 6-12 lists the service routes.

Table 6-12 Service routes for the port-shared EPL services


Route NE 1 NE 2
Location

Headquarter Port 1+VLAN ID: 100←→ VCTRUNK 1+VLAN ID: 100←→


←→Division VCTRUNK 1+VLAN ID: 100 Port 1+VLAN ID: 100
1 (NE 1←→
NE 2) Five VC-12s are bound in VCTRUNK 1.

Headquarter Port 1+VLAN ID: 200←→ VCTRUNK 2+VLAN ID: 200←→


←→Division VCTRUNK 2+VLAN ID: 200 Port 2+VLAN ID: 200
2 (NE 1←→
NE 2) Five VC-12s are bound in VCTRUNK 2.

6.6.5 Planning VCTRUNK-Shared EPL Services


The VCTRUNK-shared EPL services can be used to plan the Ethernet services.

6-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Service Requirement
User A and user A’ are community users, who are at different places. User A needs to
communicate with user A’. User B and user B’ are cyber cafe users, who are also at different
places. User B needs to communicate with user B’. The services of community users are totally
isolated from the services of cyber cafe users. Community users use the network mostly at night,
whereas cyber cafe users use the network mostly during day. Hence, community users can share
a 10M bandwidth with cyber cafe users. The Ethernet equipment of the users provides 100M
Ethernet electrical interface, but does not support the VLAN.

Networking Application
The OptiX OSN 2500 systems can be used for the community users and cyber cafe users to share
a 10M bandwidth. Figure 6-6 shows the networking diagram.

Figure 6-6 Networking diagram for the VCTRUNK-shared EPL services


B B'
PORT2 PORT2
VCTRUNK 1

PORT1 PORT1

A A'

NE 1 NE 2

Community Cyber cafe OptiX OSN


user user equipment

Application Scheme
Use the port+VLAN routing scheme for the VCTRUNK-shared EPL services. Figure 6-7 shows
the details.

Figure 6-7 Networking diagram for VCTRUNK-shared EPL services


B B'
VLAN200 VLAN200
VCTRUNK
VLAN100 VLAN100

A PORT1 PORT2 PORT2 PORT1 A'

NE 1 NE 2

Community Cyber cafe OptiX OSN


user user equipment

At NE 1, services of user A and user B are accessed from Port 1 and Port 2 respectively. VLAN
tags (VLAN ID: 100 and 200) are then added to the services, which are then converged by an

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-25


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

Ethernet processing board. The converged services are transmitted through one VCTRUNK to
NE 2.
At NE 2, the Ethernet processing board processes the converged services (VLAN ID: 100 and
200) from NE 1 and distributes the services to user A’ and user B’ respectively, according to
the VLAN tags.

Hardware Configuration
Configure one EFS4 board for NE 1 to access Ethernet services from user A and user B.
Configure one EFS4 board for NE 2 to access Ethernet services from user A’ and user B’.

Service Route
Table 6-13 lists the service routes.

Table 6-13 Routes for the VCTRUNK-shared EPL services


Route NE 1 NE 2
Location

A←→ Port 1+VLAN ID: 100←→ VCTRUNK 1+VLAN ID: 100←→


A’ (NE 1← VCTRUNK 1+VLAN ID: 100 Port 1+VLAN ID: 100
→NE 2)

B←→ Port 2+VLAN ID: 200←→ VCTRUNK 1+VLAN ID: 200←→


B’ (NE 1← VCTRUNK 1+VLAN ID: 200 Port 2+VLAN ID: 200
→NE 2)

Five VC-12s are bound in VCTRUNK 1.

6.6.6 Planning VCTRUNK-Shared EVPL Services


The VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services can be used to plan the Ethernet services.

Service Requirement
Two branches of company A are located at NE 1 and NE 2 respectively. The department of
branch 1 needs to communicate with the same department of branch 2. The service of one
department is isolated from the service of another department. The two departments should share
a 10M bandwidth. The VLAN ID for the services of the two departments of company A is 100.
The two departments of company A can provide 100M Ethernet electrical interfaces.

Networking Application
The services of the two departments are of the same VLAN ID and share a bandwidth. Hence,
such services can be configured as EVPL services. The EVPL service is encapsulated in the
MPLS-L2 VPN format and supports the identification of external labels (Tunnel) and internal
labels (VC).
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the EVPL service and can be used to meet the previous
transmission requirements. Figure 6-8 shows the networking diagram.

6-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Figure 6-8 Networking diagram for the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services

Department B PORT2 PORT2 Department B


VCTRUNK 1
PORT1
PORT1
Department A
Department A

Branch B
Branch A

NE 1 NE 2

OptiX OSN
Company A
equipment

Application Scheme
The port+MPLS routing scheme is used for the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services. Figure
6-9 shows the details.

Figure 6-9 Application scheme for the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services


Add label Strip label
PE P P PE
Department Department
PORT2 PORT2
B B
VCTRUNK1
Department
Department
A PORT1 PORT1
NE 2 A
NE 1

Branch 1 Branch 2

Company A OptiX OSN


equipment

The services of the two departments are of the same VLAN ID and share a bandwidth. Hence,
it is necessary to add MPLS labels for identification.

At NE 1, the services of departments A and B are accessed from Port 1 and Port 2, and are added
with MPLS labels (Tunnel label and VC label). The Ethernet processing board converges and
then transmits the services in one VCTRUNK to NE 2.

At NE 2, the Ethernet processing board processes the services with different MPLS labels from
NE 1 and distributes the services to the two departments of branch 2 respectively, according to
the MPLS labels.

Hardware Configuration
Configure one EFS4 board for NE 1 to access Ethernet services of department A and department
B.

Configure one EFS4 board for NE 2 to access Ethernet services of department A and department
B.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-27


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

Service Route
Table 6-14 lists the service routes.

Table 6-14 Routes for the VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services

Route NE 1 NE 2
Location

Sub- Port 1←→VCTRUNK 1+MPLS VCTRUNK 1+MPLS label 1←→Port


department label 1 1
A

Sub- Port 2←→VCTRUNK 1+MPLS VCTRUNK 1+MPLS label 2←→Port


department label 2 2
B

Five VC-12s are bound in VCTRUNK 1.

6.6.7 Planning EVPL Services (Transmit Scheme)


The EVPL services (Transmit Scheme) can be used to plan the Ethernet services.

Service Requirement
Two branches of company A are located at different places and need to transmit data services
to each other. The router that supports the MPLS is connected to the MSTP equipment. The
transmitted data packets have the MPLS labels. The MSTP equipment transmits only the MPLS
data packets and the bandwidth is 10M. Company A provides 100M Ethernet electrical
interfaces.

Networking Application
The OptiX OSN 2500 can be used to transparently transmit the MPLS data packets of the two
branches. Figure 6-10 shows the networking diagram.

Figure 6-10 Networking diagram for EVPL services (Transmit scheme)


VCTRUNK
PORT1(P) PORT1(P)
VCTRUNK 1 VCTRUNK1
(P) (P)
Branch 1 of Branch 2 of
company A Transit
Transit company A
LSP
LSP
NE 1 NE 2

OptiX OSN
Enterprise
equipment
user

The Transmit scheme for EVPL services can be applied to transparently transmit the MPLS data
packets.

6-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Application Scheme
The port+transmit LSP scheme is applied for the EVPL services.
All logical ports (Port and VCTRUNK included) of NE 1 and NE 2 are set as P ports. The LSP
is of the Transit type. The label exchange is performed to the MPLS data packets, which are
then transparently transmitted.

Hardware Configuration
Configure one EFS4 for NE 1 and NE 2 respectively to access the MPLS data packets from
company A.

Service Route

Table 6-15 Service routes for the EVPL services (Transit scheme)
Route NE 1 NE 2
Location

Company A Port 1+MPLS label 1←→ VCTRUNK 1+MPLS label 2←→Port


VCTRUNK 1+MPLS label 2 1+MPLS label 1

Five VC-12s are bound in VCTRUNK 1.The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the exchange of
only the Tunnel labels.

6.6.8 Planning EPLAN Services


The EPLAN services can be used to plan the Ethernet services.

Service Requirement
Three branches of company A are located at NE 1, NE 2 and NE 3. As required, the three branches
can communicate with each other. The three branches dynamically share a 10M bandwidth. The
Ethernet equipment of the company A provides 100M Ethernet electrical interface and the
VLAN ID is 100.

Networking Application
The three branches can communicate with each other and dynamically share a bandwidth. The
EPLAN service meets the requirements. Using a virtual bridge (VB), the Ethernet processing
board of the OptiX OSN 2500 can perform Layer 2 switching on the Ethernet data. Hence, the
OptiX OSN 2500 supports the EPLAN service. Figure 6-11 shows the networking diagram for
the EPLAN service.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-29


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

Figure 6-11 Networking diagram for the EPLAN service

PORT1

VB VCTRUNK1

Department 3 Port 1
of company A NE3

VCTRUNK2

VB PORT1
PORT1 VB

VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK1

Port 1 NE 1 NE 2 Port 1

Department 1
Department 2
of company A
of company A
Access OptiX OSN
Company A
point equipment

Application Scheme
The VB is used for the application of the EPLAN service.
Each NE in the system can create one or several VBs. Each VB establishes a port address table.
The system updates the table by self-learning. Services of branch 2 are accessed to NE 2. The
data packets select the mapping VCTRUNK according to the port address table. The data packets
are then transmitted to branch 1 and branch 3.

Hardware Configuration
Configure one EFS0 and one EFF8 for NE 1 to access Ethernet services from branch 1 of
company A.
Configure one EFS0 and one EFF8 for NE 2 to access Ethernet services from branch 2 of
company A.
Configure one EFS0 and one EFF8 for NE 3 to access Ethernet services from branch 3 of
company A.

Service Route
Table 6-16 lists the routes for the EPLAN service.

6-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Table 6-16 Routes for the EPLAN service


Route NE 1 NE 2 NE 3
Location

Company A VB (Port 1, VCTRUNK VB (Port 1, VCTRUNK VB (Port 1, VCTRUNK


1)Filter table (Port 1, 1, VCTRUNK 2)Filter 1)Filter table (Port 1,
VCTRUNK 1) for table (Port 1, VCTRUNK 1) for
VLAN ID 100 VCTRUNK 1, VLAN ID 100
VCTRUNK 2) for
VLAN ID 100

Both VCTRUNK 1 and VCTRUNK 2 are bound with five VC-12s.

6.6.9 Planning EVPLAN Services


The EVPLAN services can be used to plan the Ethernet services.

Service Requirement
Three branches of company A are located at NE 1, NE 2 and NE 3. As required, the three branches
can communicate with each other. Three branches of company B are located at NE 1, NE 2 and
NE 3. As required, the three branches also can communicate with each other. The services of
company A and B are isolated from each other and share the line bandwidth. The data packets
of company A and company B are of the same VLAN ID. Both company A and company B
provide 100M Ethernet electrical interfaces. The Ethernet equipment of users supports the
VLAN.

Networking Application
The EVPLAN services can dynamically share the bandwidth and support the isolation of MPLS
labels for the data packets accessed into the same VLAN. The data services with the same VLAN
ID are accessed into the same NE and dynamically share the bandwidth. The EVPLAN service
can meet the service requirements. Figure 6-12 shows the networking diagram for the EVPLAN
service.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-31


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

Figure 6-12 Networking diagram for the EVPLAN service

PORT2
PORT1
Department 3 of

VCTRUNK1

VCTRUNK2
company B
VB
Department 3 of
PE P PE P
company A PORT 1NE 3
PORT 2
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK1
PE P
PORT2 PE P
PORT1
VB PORT2
LSP LSP VB PORT1
PE P
PE P
VCTRUNK1 NE 1 NE 2
VCTRUNK2
PORT 2
LSP PORT 1

PORT 1
PORT 2
Department 2 of
company B
Department 2 of
Department 1 of Department 1 of company A
company A company B

Access point Company OptiX NE

Different from the EPLAN service, the EVPLAN service is further encapsulated in the MPLS
format. The data packets of the same VLAN ID are identified according to the MPLS labels.
Hence, data packets of the same VLAN but of different VBs can be carried by the same
VCTRUNK. In this way, several branches of company A and company B dynamically share the
bandwidth and have isolated services.

Application Scheme
The VB+MPLS routing scheme is used for the EVPLAN service.

The Ethernet processing boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 support the creation of VBs and the
MPLS encapsulation. The EVPLAN service supports the MPLS encapsulation. Hence, several
VB users share the same VCTRUNK. In this way, several VB users dynamically share the
bandwidth.

At NE 1, branch 1 of company A is of VB1 and branch 1 of company B is of VB2. In one


direction, VB1 and VB2 share VCTRUNK 1, which is bound with five VC-12s. In the other
direction, VB1 and VB2 share VCTRUNK 2, which is also bound with five VC-12s. In this way,
VB1 (company A) and VB2 (company B) dynamically share a 10M bandwidth. The application
schemes for NE 2 and NE 3 are the same as that for NE 1.

The EVPLAN service requires that any two nodes be connected by an LSP.

Hardware Configuration
Configure one EFS0 and one ETF8 interface boards for NE 1. Use two Ethernet ports to access
Ethernet services from branch 1 of company A and branch 1 of company B respectively.

Configure one EFS0 and one ETF8 interface boards for NE 2. Use two Ethernet ports to access
Ethernet services from branch 2 of company A and branch 2 of company B respectively.

6-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Configure one EFS0 and one ETF8 interface boards for NE 3. Use two Ethernet ports to access
Ethernet services from branch 3 of company A and branch 3 of company B respectively.

Service Route
Table 6-17 lists the service routes.

Table 6-17 Routes for the EVPLAN service


Route NE 1 NE 2 NE 3
Location

Company A VB1: Port 1, VCTRUNK 1 (MPLS label 1), VCTRUNK 2 (MPLS label 1)
Filter table (Port 1, VCTRUNK 1, VCTRUNK 2) for the VLAN ID 100

Company B VB2: Port 2, VCTRUNK 1 (MPLS label 2), VCTRUNK 2 (MPLS label 2)
Filter table (Port 2, VCTRUNK 1, VCTRUNK 2) for the VLAN ID 100

Both VCTRUNK 1 and VCTRUNK 2 are bound with five VC-12s.

6.7 Planning RPR Services


The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple RPR services. When planning the RPR services, follow
the basic principles and choose proper principles according to the actual network situation.
6.7.1 Capability of the OptiX OSN 2500 of Supporting RPR Services
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports two types of RPR services, the EVPL and EVPLAN.
6.7.2 Planning Principles
When planning the RPR services, follow the basic principles and select the corresponding service
types according to the actual network situation.
6.7.3 Planning EVPL Services for RPR Boards
The EVPL services for RPR boards can be used to plan the RPR services.
6.7.4 Planning EVPLAN Services for RPR Boards
The EVPLAN services for RPR boards ban be used to plan the RPR services.

6.7.1 Capability of the OptiX OSN 2500 of Supporting RPR Services


The OptiX OSN 2500 supports two types of RPR services, the EVPL and EVPLAN.
Table 6-18 lists the Ethernet RPR boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features.

Table 6-18 Ethernet RPR boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 and their features
Function N1EMR0 N2EMR0 N2EGR2

Interface 1 GE and 12 FE 2 GE

Service frame Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1QTAG


format

JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-33


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

Function N1EMR0 N2EMR0 N2EGR2

Maximum uplink 16 VC-4 (2.5 Gbit/s)


bandwidth

Mapping VC-3, VC-3-2v, VC-4, VC-4-xv (x≤8)


granularity

EVPL Supported

EVPLAN Supported

Static MPLS label MartinioE label supported

Stack VLAN Supported

VLAN Supports 4096 VLAN tags, as well as the addition, deletion, and
exchange of VLAN tags; compliant with IEEE 802.1q/p.

Spanning tree Supports RSTP.

Multicast listening Supported


(IGMP Snooping)

RPR protection Supports the steering, wrapping, wrapping+steering protection


schemes, with the protection switching time being less than 50 ms.

Encapsulation GFP-F, compliant with ITU-T G.7041.LAPS, compliant with ITU-T


X.86.

LCAS Supported, compliant with ITU-T G.7042

CAR CAR based on CAR based on port, port+VLAN, or port+VLAN


port, port+VLAN, +Priority, with the granularity of 64 kbit/s
with the
granularity of 64
kbit/s

Flow control Supported, compliant with IEEE 802.3X

QoS flow The N1EMR0 supports flow classification based on PORT, PORT
classification +VLAN ID, and PORT+VLAN PRI.
The N2EMR0 and N2EGR2 support flow classification based on
PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, PORT+VLAN PRI, and MPLS label.

Intra-board port Not supported Supported Supported


aggregation

Weighted fairness Supported


algorithm

Topology auto- Supported


discovery

Maximum number 255


of nodes

Service class Five classes: A0, A1, B_CIR, B_EIR, and C

6-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

6.7.2 Planning Principles


When planning the RPR services, follow the basic principles and select the corresponding service
types according to the actual network situation.

Basic Planning Principles


The RPR boards support only the EVPL and EVPLAN services.

The Ethernet data frames should be encapsulated before being accessed into an SDH network.
The connected Ethernet boards should encapsulate data frames in the same format.

The RPR boards have GE and FE optical interfaces. Optical interfaces of the same type should
be used to connect Ethernet processing boards.

Choose a proper optical module for the Ethernet board that has GE interfaces according to the
transmission distance.

If one Ethernet processing board is used with an interface board, more interfaces are available.

Set the LCAS, CAR and flow control for the Ethernet services as required.

Set the quality of service (QoS) class for different services.

When an RPR involves more than one ring, connection at the electrical layer is required.

Selection of Service Types


The RPR boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 support the EVPL and EVPLAN services. With the
guaranteed QoS, services also share the bandwidth, fairly content and have the switching
protection.

Private lines have the following features in terms of the structure:

l The services are accessed at many points.


l The services are widely distributed.
l Lower service bandwidth is required.

Due to these features, the RPR single-ring structure is not suitable for private lines. In addition,
EPL services require that the bandwidth should be guaranteed for the service of a higher priority.
As a result, the advantages of the RPR such as fairness contention and statistical multiplexing
are not fully displayed. Hence, it is recommended that you use Ethernet boards that do not have
the RPR features, for the EPL services.

In a transmission network, the common services are convergence services that require large
capacity but lower QoS. If the Ethernet processing boards that have Layer 2 switching are used
to transmit services, the following problems may occur.

l When the ring-shared scheme without Layer 2 switching is applied, all services can share
the bandwidth. If one node has large traffic volume, the bandwidth for the other nodes
cannot be guaranteed.
l If the bandwidth for each node is limited, the efficiency of sharing the bandwidth is not
realized.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-35


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

l Ethernet services are always protected at the SDH layer and require bandwidth for extra
services.
The RPR is a ring technology used to dynamically share the bandwidth. Hence, the RPR is a
proper solution for transmitting services of large granularities and low priority. The fairness
algorithm is used to achieve traffic equilibrium and the bandwidth is effectively used. In addition,
the Ethernet ring protection is provided to the services and the protection switching time is less
than 50 ms.

6.7.3 Planning EVPL Services for RPR Boards


The EVPL services for RPR boards can be used to plan the RPR services.

Service Requirement
Company A and company B are located at NE 2, and company C is located at NE 3. The Ethernet
services from companies A, B and C are to be converged at the central node, NE 1, and are then
to be transmitted to the backbone Ethernet equipment through GE interfaces. The Ethernet
services of the three companies must be isolated from each other. The Ethernet equipment at
NE 1 supports the MPLS.
The Ethernet services from companies A and B are output from FE electrical interfaces and the
Ethernet services from company C are output from GE optical interfaces. All EPL services share
the bandwidth.

Networking Application
The RPR can be used to meet the service requirements. The RPR is jointly used with the MPLS
technology to provide EVPL services that can share the bandwidth.
In Figure 6-13, NE 1–NE 4 are OptiX OSN 2500 NEs. Configure the Ethernet processing boards
that support the RPR features for NE 1, NE 2 and NE 3. The EVPL services can then be provided.
Networking diagram for the EVPL services on an RPR

6-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Figure 6-13 Networking diagram for the EVPL services on an RPR

Upper layer
network

GE

NE 1

4
NE 2
1 2 3 GE
NE 4 RPR

NE 3

FE FE
FE
Ethernet
port Department 2
n LSP of company B
Department 1
of company B
OptiX OSN
Company Company Company
equipment
A B C

Application Scheme
Use the port+VLAN+MPLS routing scheme for the EVPL services on an RPR.

The service from company A is accessed from an FE port of NE 3.

The services of the two departments of company B are accessed from another FE port of NE 3.
The services are isolated by VLAN IDs.

The service from company C is accessed from a GE port of NE 2.

All the services are converged at NE 1 and transmitted to the Ethernet equipment at the upper
layer though a GE port. The services share a 155M bandwidth.

Hardware Configuration
Configure one EGR2 board for NE 1 to converge and then transmit the Ethernet services to the
Ethernet equipment of the upper layer through a GE port.

Configure one EGR2 board for NE 2 to access the GE services from company C.

Configure one EMR0 board for NE 3 to access Ethernet services from companies A and B.

Service Route
Table 6-19 lists the service routes.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-37


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

Table 6-19 Routes for the EVPL services of the RPR boards

Route NE 1 NE 2 NE 3
Location

Company A Port 1 (GE port)+MPLS label - Port 2 (FE port 1)←→


EVPL 1 1←→RPR1 port+MPLS label RPR1 port+MPLS label
1'RPR source node: 3 1'RPR source node: 1

Company B Port 1 (GE port)+MPLS label - Port 3 (FE port 2)


EVPL 2 2+VLAN ID: 100←→RPR1 +VLAN ID: 100←→
port+MPLS label 2'+VLAN RPR1 port+MPLS label
ID: 100RPR source node: 3 2'RPR source node: 1

Company B Port 1 (GE port)+MPLS label - Port 3 (FE port 2)


EVPL 3 3+VLAN ID: 200←→RPR1 +VLAN ID: 200←→
port+MPLS label 3'+VLAN RPR1 port+MPLS label
ID: 200RPR source node: 3 3'RPR source node: 1

Company C Port 1 (GE port)+MPLS label Port 1 (GE -


EVPL 4 4←→RPR1 port+MPLS label port)←→
4'RPR source node: 2 RPR1 port
+MPLS label
4'RPR source
node: 1

6.7.4 Planning EVPLAN Services for RPR Boards


The EVPLAN services for RPR boards ban be used to plan the RPR services.

Service Requirement
The community services are accessed from NE 1, NE 2 and NE 3 at different places. The
community users at the three places should be able to communicate with each other. The
community services are converged at NE 1 and then transmitted to the backbone Ethernet
equipment through GE interfaces. The common services are accessed from NE 1, NE 2 and NE
3 at different places. The users at the three places should be able to communicate with each other.
The common services are converged at NE 1 and then transmitted to the backbone Ethernet
equipment through GE interfaces. The Ethernet equipment at place A supports the stack VLAN
tags. The community services and the common services should be isolated from each other but
share the 2 x VC-4 bandwidth. Effective protection should be provided to the Ethernet services
and the protection switching time should be less than 50 ms.

The community services include video and virtual private network (VPN) services. The common
services include IP phone and cyber cafe services, which require different priorities. For video
and IP phone services, the bandwidth should be guaranteed and the jitter should be kept under
a proper level. For the VPN service, the bandwidth should be guaranteed and extra services
should be transmitted with the best effort. The cyber cafe services should be transmitted with
the best effort.

The VLAN tags can be used to isolate different services at the same place.

6-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Networking Application
The previous service requirements are listed as follows:
l The bandwidth should be dynamically shared by multiple nodes.
l Services must be isolated.
l The protection at the Ethernet layer must be provided.
l Services of different QoS must be provided according to the service type.

To meet the previous requirements, you can use an RPR to carry the EVPLAN services.
In Figure 6-14, NE 1–NE 4 are OptiX OSN 2500 NEs. Configure the Ethernet processing boards
that support the RPR features for the four NEs. The EVPLAN services can then be provided.

Figure 6-14 Networking diagram for EVPLAN services on an RPR

Internet

GE NE 1
(Place A)

NE 4
(Place D) NE 2
(Place B)
FE FE
RPR
FE FE

FE GE

NE 3
(Place C)
GE
FE FE

Ethernet
RPR1
port
OptiX OSN Common Community
LSP
equipment user user

Application Scheme
Use the VB+VLAN+stack VLAN routing scheme for the EVPLAN service on an RPR.
Use stack VLAN tags to identify different user domains (pink and blue) and use VLAN tags of
VBs to further identify different users. The VB ports in different stack VLAN domains can share
the same VLAN tag. Figure 6-15 shows the details.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-39


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

Figure 6-15 Networking diagram for EVPLAN services on an RPR

Internet

NE 1
GE

VB1 VB2

VLAN 1 NE 4 NE 2 VLAN 1
NEVB1
4 RPR VB1
VLAN 2 VLAN 2
VB2 VB2

VLAN 1 VLAN 1

VB1 VB2

VLAN 1 NE 3 VLAN 2

VLAN 1

Ethernet
RPR1
port
Common Community
LSP OptiX OSN equipment user user

As shown in Figure 6-15, two stack VLAN domains are present on the RPR. The user domain
marked in pink is stack VLAN 2 and the user domain marked in blue is stack VLAN 1. The
services of stack VLAN 1 and stack VLAN 2 are actually two EVPLAN services. VB 1 for the
EVPLAN 1 service belongs to stack VLAN 1 and VB 2 of the EVPLAN 2 service belongs to
stack VLAN 2. Each VC may include several VLANs, such as VLAN 1 and VLAN 2. The RPR
1 port belongs to all stack VLAN domains. All services are finally connected to the Internet
through NE 1.
You can set a priority for each port on the RPR. Hence, services of different QoS can be provided
(three priorities).

Hardware Configuration
Configure one EGR2 board for NE 1 to converge and then transmit services to the Ethernet
equipment at the upper layer through a GE port.
Configure one EMR0 board for NE 2 to access community services and common FE services.
Configure one EMR0 board for NE 3 to access community services and common FE services.
Configure one EMR0 board for NE 4 to access community services and common FE services.

Service Route
Table 6-20 lists the service routes.

6-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Table 6-20 Routes of the EVPLAN services for the RPR boards
Route Service Route
Location Requireme
nt

NE 1 Common VB1: Port 1 (stack VLAN tag 1), RPR1 (stack VLAN tag 1)
services VLAN ID: 1 filter table (Port 1, RPR1)VLAN ID: 2 filter table
(Port 1, RPR1)

Community VB2: Port 1 (stack VLAN tag 2), RPR1 (stack VLAN tag 2)
services VLAN ID: 1 filter table (Port 1, RPR1)VLAN ID: 2 filter table
(Port 1, RPR1)

NE 2 Common VB1: Port 2, RPR1 (stack VLAN tag 1)VLAN ID: 1 filter table
services (Port 2, RPR1)VLAN ID: 2 filter table (Port 2, RPR1)

Community VB2: Port 3, RPR1 (stack VLAN tag 2)VLAN ID: 1 filter table
services (Port 3, RPR1)

NE 3 Common VB1: Port 2, RPR1 (stack VLAN tag 1)VLAN ID: 1 filter table
services (Port 2, RPR1)

Community VB2: Port 3, RPR1 (stack VLAN tag 2)VLAN ID: 1 filter table
services (Port 3, RPR1)VLAN ID: 2 filter table (Port 3, RPR1)

NE 4 Common VB1: Port 2, RPR1 (stack VLAN tag 1)VLAN ID: 1 filter table
services (Port 2, RPR1)VLAN ID: 2 filter table (Port 2, RPR1)

Community VB2: Port 3, RPR1 (stack VLAN tag 2)VLAN ID: 1 filter table
services (Port 3, RPR1)

6.8 Planning ATM and IMA Services


The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple ATM and IMA services. When planning the ATM and
IMA services, follow the basic principles.
6.8.1 Capability of Supporting the ATM and IMA Services
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the ATM services, such as the CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and UBR.
6.8.2 Planning Principles
When planning the ATM and IMA services, follow the basic principles and select the
corresponding service types according to the actual network situation.
6.8.3 Planning Transparently Transmitted ATM Services
The method of planning the transparently transmitted ATM services is defined.
6.8.4 Planning Multicast ATM Services
The method of planning the multicast ATM services is defined.
6.8.5 Planning Statistically Multiplexed ATM Services
The method of planning the statistically multiplexed ATM services is defined.
6.8.6 Planning IMA Services
The method of planning the IMA services is defined.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-41


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

6.8.1 Capability of Supporting the ATM and IMA Services


The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the ATM services, such as the CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and UBR.

The OptiX OSN 2500 provides four ATM boards, which are the ADL4, ADQ1, IDL4 and IDQ1.
The IDL4 and IDQ1 support the IMA function. Table 6-21 lists the features of the ADL4 and
ADQ1. Table 6-22 lists the features of the IDL4 and IDQ1.

Table 6-21 Features of the ADL4 and ADQ1

Function ADL4 ADQ1

Front panel interface 1 x STM-4 4 x STM-1

Optical interface S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, and Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, and
specification Ve-4.2 Ve-1.2

E3 ATM interface Accesses 12 x E3 services by using the N1PD3, N1PL3, or


N1PL3A board.

IMA Not supported

Maximum uplink 8 VC-4, or 12 VC-3 + 4 VC-4


bandwidth

ATM switching 1.2 Gbit/s


capability

Mapping mode VC-3, VC-4, or VC-4-xv (x≤4)

Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and UBR

Number of ATM 2048


connections

Traffic type and QoS IETF RFC2514, ATM Forum TM 4.0

Supported ATM Spatial multicast and logical multicast


multicast connections

ATM protection (ITU-T Unidirectional or bidirectional 1+1, 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring


I.630)

OAM function (ITU-T I. AIS, RDI, LB (loopback), CC (continuity check)


610)

Table 6-22 Features of the IDL4 and IDQ1

Function N1IDL4 N1IDQ1

Front panel interface 1 x STM-4 4 x STM-1

Optical interface S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, and Ve-4.2 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, and
specification Ve-1.2

E3 ATM interface Not supported

6-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Function N1IDL4 N1IDQ1

IMA (compliant with l Accesses and processes IMA services when working with the E1
ATM Forum IMA 1.1 processing board N1PQ1, N1PQM, or N2PQ1.
standards) l Supports a maximum of 63 IMA E1 services.
l Supports the mapping of a maximum of 16 IMA groups to the
ATM port. Each IMA group supports 1–32 E1 services.
l Supports the mapping of a maximum of 63 E1 links (which are
not in any IMA group) to the ATM port.
l Supports a maximum of 226 ms of IMA multipath delay.

Maximum uplink 8 VC-4, or 63 VC-12 + 7 VC-4


bandwidth

ATM switching 1.2 Gbit/s


capability

Mapping mode VC-12, VC-4, or VC-4-xv (x≤4)

Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and UBR

Number of ATM 2048


connections

Traffic type and QoS IETF RFC2514, ATM Forum TM 4.0

Supported ATM Spatial multicast and logical multicast


multicast connections

ATM protection (ITU- Unidirectional or bidirectional 1+1, 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring


T I.630)

OAM function (ITU-T AIS, RDI, LB (Loopback), CC (continuity check)


I.610)

Board level 1+1 Supported, with switching time less than 1s


protection

6.8.2 Planning Principles


When planning the ATM and IMA services, follow the basic principles and select the
corresponding service types according to the actual network situation.

Basic Planning Principles


Choose the proper optical modules according to the transmission distance.
When the E3 ATM service is accessed, configure the ATM processing board for the E3 service.
When an IMA board is used to process the IMA service, configure an E1 service processing
board.
The ATM service can be protected by using the protection schemes for the SDH network. It is
recommended to use a bidirectional MSP ring and a VP-Ring or VC-Ring for networking. In

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-43


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

this way, if the SDH network does not provide any protection, you can use the VP-Ring or VC-
Ring protection to protect the ATM service.
According to the importance of the service, decide whether to use the 1+1 protection for the
IMA boards.
Set the traffic parameters according to the service type.

Selection of Application Schemes


Both the ATM and IMA boards support the transparent transmission, multicast and statistical
multiplexing of the ATM service.
The basic function of the MSTP equipment is to transparently transmit ATM services in a point-
to-point manner. This function has the following features:
l The bandwidth of the SDH equipment is used exclusively and thus the bandwidth utilization
is of a low rate.
l The protection schemes for the SDH network are used to provide the SDH-layer protection.
As a result, the reliability is increased.
The multicast is a point-to-point application scheme. For example, a message is transmitted from
the central node to other nodes in the network. The multicast services are carried by the SDH
network. Each multicast service uses a specific bandwidth exclusively and thus the bandwidth
utilization is of a low rate.
The statistical multiplexing of the ATM services is widely used to statistically multiplex ATM
services accessed from different nodes into one VC-4. The VC-4s are converged to one port of
the central node and then transmitted to the ATM switch at the upper layer. In this way, both
the bandwidth resource and the port resource are saved.

6.8.3 Planning Transparently Transmitted ATM Services


The method of planning the transparently transmitted ATM services is defined.

Service Requirement
The ATM switch at one place needs to communicate with the ATM switch at another place. The
bandwidth is 100 Mbit/s. The ATM switch provides 155 Mbit/s optical interfaces and the service
type is CBR.
The services between the two places are important and must be protected.

Networking Application
The OptiX OSN 2500 can be used to transmit the ATM services between the two places. Figure
6-16 shows the networking diagram.

Figure 6-16 Figure 6-19 Networking diagram for transparent transmission of ATM services
155 Mbit/s optical 155 Mbit/s optical
interface interface
Working trail
ATM
ATM
Protection trail switch
switch
NE 1 NE 2
MSTP network

MSTP

6-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Use two OptiX OSN 2500 systems at the two places and the two systems are named NE 1 and
NE 2. Each OptiX OSN 2500 NE is connected to the 155 Mbit/s optical interface of the ATM
switch.

The ATM services between NE 1 and NE 2 must be protected. For this purpose, configure a
working trail and a protection trail in the MSTP network. Configure the service as a pass-through
service at the SDH NEs that the working trail and the protection trail involve.

Application Scheme
Use the point-to-point transparent transmission scheme.

The protection in the SDH network can be used to protect the service.

Hardware Configuration
Configure one ADQ1 for both NE 1 and NE 2 to access the 155 Mbit/s ATM service from the
ATM switch.

NOTE

The ATM 155 Mbit/s optical interface shares the same features with the SDH STM-1 optical interface. If
MSTP equipment is not required to process the ATM service, you can use the SDH line board, such as the
SLQ1, instead of the ATM board.

Service Route
Table 6-23 lists the service routes.

Table 6-23 Routes for transparently transmitted ATM services

Route Type NE 1 NE 2

Working route ATM external port VC-4 (working trail)←→ATM internal port 1
1←→ATM ←→ATM external port 1
internal port 1←→
VC-4 (working
trail)

Protection route ATM external 1← VC-4 (protection trail)←→ATM internal port


→ATM internal 2←→ATM external port 1
port 2←→VC-4
(protection trail)

NOTE

The ATM external port is also the external optical interface where ATM services are accessed. The ATM
internal port is the logical port VCTRUNK, which is the port used to connect the ATM processing module
and the SDH cross-connect module.
The VPI and VCI for the working route and the protection route can be the same or can be different.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-45


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

6.8.4 Planning Multicast ATM Services


The method of planning the multicast ATM services is defined.

Service Requirement
The ATM service (TV program) at place A needs to be transmitted to places B, C and D in a
unidirectional manner. The ATM service is from the ATM switch and the bandwidth for the
service is 50 Mbit/s.

The ATM switch provides 155 Mbit/s optical interfaces and the service is of the CBR type.

Networking Application
The ATM processing boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 support the unidirectional multicast of the
ATM services.

Figure 6-17 shows the networking diagram.

Four OptiX OSN 2500 systems are used as NE 1, NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4 at the four places
respectively. NE 1 at place A is the central node, which receives the ATM service from the ATM
switch and then multicasts the ATM service to NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4.

NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4 receive the multicast ATM service transmitted from the ATM switch.

Figure 6-17 Figure 6-20 Networking diagram for the multicast ATM services

155M optical
interfaces

NE 1 155M optical
(1,32) (place A) interfaces
(1,34)
NE 2 STM-4 two-fiber
NE 4
(place B) unprotected ring
(place D)
155M optical NE 3
(1,33)
interfaces (place C)

155M optical
interfaces

The numbers in the bracket


indicates the VPI and VCI
values respectively.

OptiX OSN
equipment ATM switch DSLAM

Application Scheme
The point-to-point multicast scheme is used first to duplicate the service from the ATM switch
and then to transmit the service to NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4.

6-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Hardware Configuration
For NE 1, configure one ADQ1, which is used to access the 155 Mbit/s ATM service from the
ATM switch.

For each of NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4, configure one ADQ1 board, which is used to receive the
multicast service from NE 1.

Service Route
Table 6-24 lists the service routes.

Table 6-24 Routes for multicast ATM services

Route NE 1 NE 2 NE 3 NE 4
Location

NE 1 to NE Root connection: p2p connection: - -


2 ATM external VC-4 (No.1)→
port 1 (1, 32)→ ATM internal port 1
ATM internal (1, 32)→ATM
port 1 (1, 32)→ external port 1 (1,
VC-4 (No.1) 32)

NE 1 to NE Leave VC-4 pass-through P2P connection: -


3 connection: VC-4 (No.2)→
ATM external ATM internal port
port 1 (1, 32)→ 1 (1, 33)→ATM
ATM internal external port 1 (1,
port 2 (1, 33)→ 33)
VC-4 (No.2)

NE 1 to NE Leave - - p2p
4 connection: connection:
ATM external VC-4 (No.3)
port 1 (1, 32)→ →ATM
ATM internal internal port 1
port 3 (1, 34)→ (1, 34)→ATM
VC-4 (No.3) external port 1
(1, 34)

NOTE

The external ATM port is also the external optical interface where ATM services are accessed. The internal
ATM port is the logical port VCTRUNK, which is the port used to connect the ATM processing module
and the SDH cross-connect module.
The ATM service that NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4 receive is duplicated at the central node, NE 1. Hence, it is
required to create one root connection and two unidirectional leaf connections at NE 1. The ATM service
in the root connection cannot be duplicated for the leaf connections.
The VC connection is used. The numbers in the brackets are values of the VPI and VCI. For example, (1,
32) indicates that the VPI value is 1 and the VCI value is 32.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-47


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

6.8.5 Planning Statistically Multiplexed ATM Services


The method of planning the statistically multiplexed ATM services is defined.

Service Requirement
In one city, a communication line is to be created and should cover places A, B, C and D. The
services from the DSLAM nodes at places B, C and D should be transmitted to the ATM switch
at place A. The ATM switch provides one 155 Mbit/s optical interface to access the ATM service
from each node. Table 6-25 lists the service requirements.

Table 6-25 Requirements for statistically multiplexing ATM services


Transmission Source Node Sink Bandwidt
Mode Node h

Point to point NE 2 provides 155 Mbit/s POS interfaces. NE 1 3 x 10 Mbit/


s

Point to point NE 3 provides 155 Mbit/s POS interfaces. NE 1 2 x 20 Mbit/


s

Point to point NE 4 provides 155 Mbit/s and 34 Mbit/s NE 1 1 x 30 Mbit/


POS interfaces. s
1 x 20 Mbit/
s

The ATM service at each node is of the CBR type.


The ATM service must be protected.

Networking Application
The total bandwidth for the ATM services converged to NE 1 is 120 Mbit/s (3 x 10 Mbit/s + 2
x 20 Mbit/s + 30 Mbit/s + 20 Mbit/s). The ATM services can share a VC-4 bandwidth.
The OptiX OSN 2500 can be used to transmit and converge the data services. The ATM services
can be statistically multiplexed in a point-to-point manner and share a bandwidth on the ring.
The OptiX OSN 2500 is used as a multi-service transmission platform (MSTP) to transmit and
converge ATM services.
Figure 6-18 shows the networking diagram.

6-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Figure 6-18 Networking diagram for the statistically multiplexed ATM services

155M optical
interfaces

NE 1
NE 4
(place A)
10M (place D)
(6,0)
(1,0) Two-fiber (7,0)
(2,0) bidirectional 20M
10M (3,0) MSP ring
30M
NE 2 NE 3 (4,0)
(place B) (place C) (5,0)
10M

20M 20M

OptiX OSN
ATM switch DSLAM
equipment

Four OptiX OSN 2500 systems are used at the four places and are named NE 1, NE 2, NE 3 and
NE 4 respectively. NE 1 is the central node, which receives and converges the ATM services
from other nodes, and then transmits the ATM services to the ATM switch.
NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4 receive the ATM services from the DSLAM nodes and then multiplex the
ATM services into one VC-4. The VC-4 is then transmitted to the central node, NE 1.

Application Scheme
The statistical multiplexing scheme is used to statistically multiplex the ATM services accessed
from NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4 into one VC-4. The ATM services are converged to one port of NE
1 and then transmitted to the ATM switch at the upper layer.
The two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring protection can be used to protect the ATM services with
the switching time being less than 50 ms.

Hardware Configuration
For NE 1, configure one ADQ1 board, which is used to converge the ATM services from each
node and transmit the ATM services to the ATM switch at the upper layer through a 155 Mbit/
s port.
For each of the NEs, NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4, configure one ADQ1 board, which is used to receive
the ATM services from the DSLAM nodes.
For NE 4, configure one ADQ1 board and one PL3 board, which are jointly used to access the
34 Mbit/s ATM services. The ATM services can then share the bandwidth on the ring.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-49


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

Service Route
Table 6-26 lists the service routes.

Table 6-26 Routes for the statistically multiplexed ATM services


Route NE 1 NE 2 NE 3 NE 4
Location

NE 1 to ATM external 10 Mbit/s service 1: Pass-through Pass-through


NE 2 port 1 (1–3, 0) ATM external port 1 service: ATM service: ATM
←→ATM (1, 0)←→ATM internal port 2 internal port 1 (1–
internal port 1 internal port 1 (1, 0)← (1–3, 0)←→ 3, 0)←→ATM
(1–3, 0)←→ →VC-4 (No.1) ATM internal internal port 2 (1–
VC-4 (No.1) port 2 (1–3, 0) 5, 0)←→VC-4
10 Mbit/s service 2: ←→VC-4 (No. (No.1)
ATM external port 2 1)
(2, 0)←→ATM
internal port 1 (2, 0)←
→VC-4 (No.1)

10 Mbit/s service 3:
ATM external port 3
(3, 0)←→ATM
internal port 1 (3, 0)←
→VC-4 (No.1)

E 1 to NE ATM external - 20 Mbit/s Pass-through


3 port 1 (4–5, 0) service 1: ATM service: ATM
←→ATM external port 1 internal port 1 (4–
internal port 1 (4, 0)←→ 5, 0)←→ATM
(4–5, 0)←→ ATM internal internal port 2 (4–
VC-4 (No.1) port 2 (4, 0)← 5, 0)←→VC-4
→VC-4 (No.1) (No.1)

- 20 Mbit/s
service 2: ATM
external port 2
(5, 0)←→
ATM internal
port 2 (5, 0)←
→VC-4 (No.1)

NE 1 to ATM external - - 20 Mbit/s service


NE 4 port 1 (6–7, 0) 1: PL3 interface←
←→ATM →ATM internal
internal port 1 port 3 (6, 0)←→
(6–7, 0)←→ ATM internal port
VC-4 (No.1) 2 (6, 0)←→VC-4
(No.1)

6-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Route NE 1 NE 2 NE 3 NE 4
Location

30 Mbit/s service
1: ATM external
port 1 (7, 0)←→
ATM internal port
2 (7, 0)←→VC-4
(No.1)

NOTE

The external ATM port is also the external optical interface where ATM services are accessed. The internal
ATM port is the logical port VCTRUNK, which is the port used to connect the ATM processing module
and the SDH cross-connect module.
The VP connection is used. The numbers in the bracket are values of the VPI and VCI. For example, (1,
0) indicates that the VPI value is 1 and the VCI value is 0.

6.8.6 Planning IMA Services


The method of planning the IMA services is defined.

Service Requirement
A radio network controller (RNC) is at place A. Three base station subsystems (BSSs) are at
places B, C and D. The RNC needs to access the ATM services from the three BSSs. The RNC
provides one 155 Mbit/s ATM optical interface. At each BSS, the inverse multiplexing for ATM
(IMA) scheme is used to access the ATM service at the rate of 2 Mbit/s.Table 6-27 lists the
requirements for the IMA services among the nodes.

Table 6-27 Requirements for IMA services among the nodes

Requirement Type Source Sink Required


Node Node Bandwidth at the
SDH Side

32 x 2 Mbit/s point-to-point IMA services NE 2 NE 1 40 Mbit/s

16 x 2 Mbit/s point-to-point IMA services NE 3 NE 1 20 Mbit/s

32 x 2 Mbit/s point-to-point IMA services NE 4 NE 1 40 Mbit/s

The ATM service of each node is of the CBR type.

The ATM service must be protected.

Networking Application
The IMA boards and E1 interface boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 can be used to meet the service
requirements. Figure 6-19 shows the networking diagram.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-51


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

Figure 6-19 Networking diagram for the IMA services

155 Mbit/s ATM

1# VC-4
(50x VC12)

NE 1 (place A)
NE 4
(place D)
NE 2 Two-fiber bidirectional
(place B) MSP ring 32 x IMA E1

1# VC-4
32 x IMA NE 3
E1 (place C)
1# VC-4 1# VC-4
(20x VC12) (30x VC12)

16 x IMA E1

ATM service

OptiX OSN Radio Network Controller Base Station Subsystem


equipment (RNC) (BSS )

Four OptiX OSN 2500 systems are used at the four places and are named NE 1, NE 2, NE 3 and
NE 4 respectively. At NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4, the 2 Mbit/s ATM services are accessed from the
BSSs. The ATM services are converged on the IMA board and then transmitted in the SDH
network in the same VC-4. At NE 1, the VC-4 is cross-connected to the ATM board, which
transmits the ATM services to the RNC through the ATM optical interface.

Application Scheme
The IMA group + statistical multiplexing scheme is used for the IMA services.

At NE 2, perform the following operations in sequence:

l Set one IMA group on the IMA board to access 32 x 2 Mbit/s IMA services.
l Cross-connect the IMA group to a VC-4 internal port of the IMA board.
l Set the traffic volume of the internal port to 40 Mbit/s. The bandwidth is then aggregated.
l Cross-connect the internal port to one VC-4 at the SDH layer to transmit the IMA services.

At NE 3, perform the following operations in sequence:

l Set one IMA group on the IMA board to access 16 x 2 Mbit/s IMA services.
l Cross-connect the IMA group to a VC-4 internal port of the IMA board.
l Set the traffic volume of the interval port to 20 Mbit/s. The bandwidth is then aggregated.
l Converge 20 VC-12s of NE 2 to the same internal port.

6-52 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

l Cross-connect the internal port to one VC-4 at the SDH layer to transmit the IMA services.

At NE 4, perform the following operations in sequence:


l Set one IMA group on the IMA board to access 32 x 2 Mbit/s IMA services.
l Cross-connect the IMA group to a VC-4 internal port of the IMA board.
l Set the traffic volume of the interval port to 40 Mbit/s. The bandwidth is then aggregated.
l Converge 30 VC-12s of NE 2 and NE 3 to the same internal port.
l Cross-connect the internal port to one VC-4 at the SDH layer to transmit the IMA services.

The MSP scheme in the SDH network can be used to protect the ATM services.

Hardware Configuration
For NE 1, configure one IDQ1, which is used to access the 155 Mbit/s ATM service from the
ATM switch.
For each of NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4, use one IDQ1, one PQ1 and two D75 boards to access the 2
Mbit/s IMA service.

Service Route
Table 6-28 lists the routes for the IMA services.

Table 6-28 IMA service routes


Route NE 1 NE 2 NE 3 NE 4
Positio
n

NE 1 to ATM external port 32 x IMA ←→PQ1 Pass-through Pass-through


NE 2 1 (1, 32)←→ATM ←→ first IMA service: ATM service: ATM
internal port 2 (1, group (1, 32) of internal port 3 internal port 3 (1,
32)←→VC-4 (No. IDQ1 internal port (1, 32)←→ 32)←→ATM
1) 1←→ATM internal ATM internal internal port 2 (1,
port 2 (1, 32)←→ port 2 (1, 32)← 32)←→VC-4
VC-4 (No.1) →VC-4 (No.1) (No.1)

NE 1 to ATM external port - 16 x IMA ←→ Pass-through


NE 3 1 (1, 33)←→ATM PQ1←→first service: ATM
internal port 2 (1, IMA group (1, internal port 3 (1,
33)←→VC-4 (No. 32) of IDQ1 33)←→ATM
1) internal port 1← internal port 2 (1,
→ATM internal 33)←→VC-4
port 2 (1, 33)← (No.1)
→VC-4 (No.1)

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-53


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

Route NE 1 NE 2 NE 3 NE 4
Positio
n

NE 1 to ATM external port - - 32 x IMA ←→


NE 4 1 (1, 34)←→ATM PQ1←→first
internal port 2 (1, IMA group (1,
34)←→VC-4 (No. 34) of IDQ1
1) internal port 1←
→ATM internal
port 2 (1, 34)←
→VC-4 (No.1)

NOTE

The external ATM port of the IDQ1is also the external optical interface where ATM services are accessed.
The internal ATM port is the logical port VCTRUNK, which is the port used to connect the ATM processing
module and the SDH cross-connect module.
The numbers in the bracket are values of the VPI and VCI. For example, (1, 32) indicates that the VPI
value is 1 and the VCI value is 32.

6.9 Planning SAN and Video Services


The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple SAN and video services. When planning the SAN and
video services, follow the basic principles and choose proper principles according to the actual
network situation.
6.9.1 Capability of Supporting SAN and Video Services
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the SAN and video services, such as the FC, FICON, ESCON,
and DVB-ASI services.
6.9.2 Planning Principles
The total bandwidth for the services accessed by the N1MST4 does not exceed 2.5 Gbit/s. Only
the first and the second ports can be used to support the distance extension function at the SDH
or client side.
6.9.3 Planning Transparently Transmitted SAN Services
The method of planning the transparently transmitted SAN services is defined.

6.9.1 Capability of Supporting SAN and Video Services


The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the SAN and video services, such as the FC, FICON, ESCON,
and DVB-ASI services.

The N1MST4 for the OptiX OSN 2500 supports transparent transmission of the SAN and video
services. The details on the capability of the N1MST4 are shown as follows:

l Provide four stand-alone ports to access services.


l Support the FC service (FC100/FICON and FC2000) for four ports. The bandwidth is no
more than 2.5 Gbit/s. The FC service can be transmitted at the full rate. In other words, one
FC200 or two FC100 services are supported.

6-54 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

l The first and the second ports support the distance extension function at the SDH side for
FC100 and FC200 services. The FC100 service supports an extended distance of 3000 km
and the FC200 supports an extended distance of 1500 km.
l The first and the second ports support the distance extension function at the client side for
FC100 and FC200 services. The FC100 service supports an extended distance of 40 km
and the FC200 supports an extended distance of 20 km.
l Provide four ports to support the ESCON or DVB-ASI service.
l Encapsulate all services in the GFP-T format, which complies with ITU-T G.7041. Services
are mapped into VC-4 or VC-4-xc (x: 4, 8 or 16).
Table 6-29 lists the services and their rates supported by the N1MST4 board.

Table 6-29 Services supported by the N1MST4 and their rates


Service Rate Remarks

FC100/FICON 1062.5 Mbit/s SAN service

FC200 2125 Mbit/s SAN service

ESCON 200 Mbit/s SAN service

DVB-ASI 270 Mbit/s Video service

6.9.2 Planning Principles


The total bandwidth for the services accessed by the N1MST4 does not exceed 2.5 Gbit/s. Only
the first and the second ports can be used to support the distance extension function at the SDH
or client side.

6.9.3 Planning Transparently Transmitted SAN Services


The method of planning the transparently transmitted SAN services is defined.

Service Requirement
The headquarter of company A at NE 1 needs to back up the storage area network (SAN) service
to one branch 10 km away from NE 1. The service to be backed up and transmitted is the 2 x
ESCON service.

Networking Application
The OptiX OSN 2500 can transparently transmit SAN services such as the ESCON service.
Figure 6-20 shows the networking diagram.

Figure 6-20 Networking diagram for transparently transmitting SAN services


2×ESCON
2×ESCON

Headquarters Branch of
NE 1 NE 2
of company A company A

OptiX OSN equipment Enterprise user

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-55


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

Application Scheme
Use the SDH system to transmit the ESCON services and to map the ESCON services into
VC-4-4c.
The protection in the SDH network can be used to protect the ESCON services.

Hardware Configuration
Configure one MST4 for NE 1 to access the SAN service from the headquarters of company A.
Configure one MST4 for NE 2 to transmit the SAN service from the headquarters to the SAN
device for backup through an ESCON interface.

Service Route
Table 6-30 lists the service routes.

Table 6-30 Routes for transparently transmitted SAN services


Route Location NE 1 NE 2

NE 1 to NE 2 MST4 ports 1–2←→VC-4 MST4 ports 1–2←→VC-4


concatenation←→line concatenation←→line

6.10 Planning DDN Services


The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple types of DDN services. When planning the DDN
services, follow the basic principles.
6.10.1 Capability of Supporting DDN Services
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the DDN services, such as the N x 64 kbit/s (N: 1–31) service
and framed E1 service.
6.10.2 Plannig Principles
The planning the DDN should follow the basic principles.
6.10.3 Planning N x 64 kbit/s Services (Point-to-Point Transmission)
The method of planning the point-to-point transmission of N x 64 kbit/s services is defined.
6.10.4 Planning Framed E1 Services (Point-to-Point Transmission)
The method of planning the point-to-point transmission of framed E1 services is defined.
6.10.5 Planning N x 64 kbit/s and Framed E1 Services (Hybrid Transmission)
The method of planning the hybrid transmission of N x 64 kbit/s and framed E1 services is
defined.
6.10.6 Planning Converged Framed E1 Services
The method of planning the converged framed E1 is defined.
6.10.7 Planning Converged N x 64 kbit/s Services
The method of planning the converged N x 64 kbit/s services is defined.

6-56 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

6.10.1 Capability of Supporting DDN Services


The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the DDN services, such as the N x 64 kbit/s (N: 1–31) service
and framed E1 service.
The OptiX OSN 2500 uses the N1DM12, which is an interface board, to access DDN services
and uses the N1DX1 and N1DXA, which are DDN processing boards, to process DDN services.
Table 6-31 lists the features of the N1DX1, N1DXA and N1DM12.

Table 6-31 Features of the N1DX1 (N1DM12) and N1DXA


Board N1DX1 (N1DM12) N1DXA
Feature

Processing Process 8 x N x 64 kbit/s and 8 x framed Process 63 x 64 kbit/s cross-


capability E1 services. Process the 48 x 64 kbit/s connections of the framed signals
cross-connections of the framed E1 at the SDH side.
signals at the SDH side.

Bandwidth at 48 x E1. 63 x E1.


the SDH side

Interface type N x 64 kbit/s interface: RS232, RS449, -


EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.36, X.
21.Framed E1 interface: CRC4, non-
CRC4.

Interface 75 or 120 ohms. -


impedance

Interface Interfaces provided by the N1DM12. -


mode

Protection 1:N (N≤4) TPS with the switching Not supported.


time less than 50 ms.

Loopback Inloop and outloop for all ports.

PRBS self-test Supported. Not supported.

The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the following networking application schemes for DDN services:
l Point-to-point transmission of N x 64 kbit/s services
l Point-to-point transmission of framed E1 services
l Hybrid transmission of N x 64 kbit/s and framed E1 services
l Convergence of framed E1 services
l Convergence of N x 64 kbit/s services

6.10.2 Plannig Principles


The planning the DDN should follow the basic principles.
When the DX1 is used to access N x 64 kbit/s and framed E1 services, the DM12 is required.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-57


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

The DXA does not provide interfaces. Hence, the DXA is used only to cross-connect and
converge 63 x 64 kbit/s signals of framed E1 or fraction E1 services at the cross-connect side.

NOTE

Framed E1: Framed E1 indicates the standard E1 bit stream where the header signals are carried by the
TS0 timeslot.
Fraction E1: Fraction E1 indicates that only some timeslots of the E1 are usable. Fraction E1 is a special
form of the framed E1.

6.10.3 Planning N x 64 kbit/s Services (Point-to-Point Transmission)


The method of planning the point-to-point transmission of N x 64 kbit/s services is defined.

Service Requirement
One 4 x 64 kbit/s service is to be transmitted between the headquarters of company A, at NE 1,
and a branch, at NE 2. The V.35 protocol is applied as the interface protocol.

Networking Application
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the point-to-point transmission of N x 64 kbit/s services. Figure
6-21 shows the networking diagram.

Figure 6-21 Networking diagram for the N x 64 kbit/s service (point-to-point transmission)
4 x 64k 4 x 64k

Headquarters of Branch of
NE 1 NE 2
company A company A

OptiX OSN equipment Enterprise user

Application Scheme
The DM12 interface board first accesses the 4 x 64 kbit/s service and then the DX1 maps the
service into a VC-12, which is transmitted by a line board.

The protection in the SDH network is used to protect the 4 x 64 kbit/s service.

Hardware Configuration
Configure one DX1 and one DM12 for NE 1 to access the 4 x 64 kbit/s service from the
headquarters of company A.

Configure one DX1 and one DM12 for NE 2 to access the 4 x 64 kbit/s service from the branch
of company A.

Service Route
Table 6-32 lists the service routes.

6-58 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

Table 6-32 Routes for the N x 64 kbit/s service (point-to-point transmission)

Route NE 1 NE 2
Position

NE 1 to NE 2 4 x 64 kit/s service←→DDN port of 4 x 64 kit/s service←→DDN


the DM12←→DX1←→ cross- port of the DM12←→DX1←→
connect board←→line cross-connect board←→line

6.10.4 Planning Framed E1 Services (Point-to-Point Transmission)


The method of planning the point-to-point transmission of framed E1 services is defined.

Service Requirement
One framed E1 service is to be transmitted between the headquarters of company A at one place,
and a branch at another place. The V.35 protocol is applied as the interface protocol.

Networking Application
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the point-to-point transmission of N x 64 kbit/s services. Figure
6-22 shows the networking diagram.

Figure 6-22 Networking diagram for the framed E1 service (point-to-point transmission)
Frame
Frame
E1
E1
Headquarters Branch of
of company A NE 1 NE 2
company A

OptiX OSN equipment Enterprise user

Application Scheme
The DM12 interface board first accesses the framed E1 service and then the DX1 maps the
service into a VC-12, which is transmitted by a line board.

Hardware Configuration
Configure one DX1 and one DM12 for NE 1 to access the framed E1 service from the
headquarters of company A.

Configure one DX1 and one DM12 for NE 2 to access the framed service from the branch of
company A.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-59


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

Service Route

Table 6-33 Routes for the framed E1 service (point-to-point transmission)


Route NE 1 NE 2
Position

NE 1 to NE 2 Frame E1 service←→Frame E1 port Frame E1 service←→Frame E1


of the DM12←→DX1←→cross- port of the DM12←→DX1←→
connect board←→line cross-connect board←→line

6.10.5 Planning N x 64 kbit/s and Framed E1 Services (Hybrid


Transmission)
The method of planning the hybrid transmission of N x 64 kbit/s and framed E1 services is
defined.

Service Requirement
One 4 x 64 kbit/s service is to be transmitted between the headquarters of company A, at NE 1
and a branch, at NE 2. One framed E1 service is to be transmitted between the headquarters of
company B, at NE 1, and a branch, at NE 2.

Networking Application
Figure 6-23 shows the networking diagram.

Figure 6-23 Networking diagram for the framed E1 and N x 64 kbit/s services (hybrid
transmission)
Branch of
company A
Headquarters
of company A
4 x 64k 4 x 64k

NE 1 NE 2
Headquarters Frame E1 Frame E1
of company B Branch of
company B
OptiX OSN
Enterprise user
equipment

Application Scheme
The DM12 interface board first accesses the 4 x 64 kbit/s and the framed E1 services and then
the DX1 maps the services into a VC-12, which is transmitted by a line board.

6-60 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

NOTE

If any spare 64 kbit/s timeslots (fraction E1) are present in the framed E1, the 4 x 64 kbit/s service can be
combined with the fraction E1 and then mapped into a VC-12. In this way, the bandwidth is saved.

Hardware Configuration
Configure one DX1 and one DM12 for NE 1 to access the 4 x 64 kbit/s service from the
headquarters of company A and the framed E1 service from the headquarters of company B.
Configure one DX1 and one DM12 for NE 2 to access the 4 x 64 kbit/s service from the branch
of company A and the framed E1 service from the branch of company B.

Service Route
Table 6-34 lists the service routes.

Table 6-34 Routes for the 4 x 64 kbit/s and the framed E1 service (hybrid transmission)
Route NE 1 NE 2
Position

Company A: 4 x 64 kbit/s service←→DDN port of 4 x 64 kbit/s service←→DDN


NE 1 to NE 2 the DM12←→DX1←→cross-connect port of the DM12←→DX1←→
board←→line cross-connect board←→line

Company B: Framed E1 service←→Framed E1 port Framed E1 service←→Framed


NE 1 to NE 2 of the DM12←→DX1←→cross- E1 port of the DM12←→DX1
connect board←→line ←→cross-connect board←→
line

6.10.6 Planning Converged Framed E1 Services


The method of planning the converged framed E1 is defined.

Service Requirement
The headquarters of company A is located at NE 1 and two departments are located at NE 2.
Each department needs to transmit a framed E1 service to the headquarters.

Networking Application
The OptiX OSN 2500 can be used to meet the service requirement. The services from the two
departments are converged at NE 2 and then transmitted to the headquarters through NE 1.
Figure 6-24 shows the networking diagram.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-61


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

Figure 6-24 Networking diagram for the converged framed E1 service


Department 1
Headquarters of company A
of company A Frame E1
Frame E1
Frame E1

Department 2
of company A
NE 1 NE 2

OptiX OSN equipment Enterprise user

Application Scheme
The DX1 board of NE 1 maps the framed E1 service into a VC-12 and then transmits the VC-12
to NE 2 through the SDH network.

The framed E1 signals are separated from the SDH service at NE 2. The DX1 board of NE 2
then converts the framed E1 signals to framed E1 services, which are finally transmitted to the
two departments.

Hardware Configuration
Configure one DX1 and one DM12 for NE 1 to access the framed E1 service from the
headquarters of company A.

Configure one DX1 and one DM12 for NE 2 to access the framed E1 service from the two
departments of company A.

Service Route
Table 6-35 lists the service routes.

Table 6-35 Routes for the converted framed E1 services

Route Position NE 1 NE 2

Headquarters←→ Framed E1 service←→Framed Framed E1 service←→Framed


branch 1 (NE 1 to NE E1 port of the DM12←→DX1← E1 port of the DM12←→DX1
2) →cross-connect board←→line ←→cross-connect board←→
line

Headquarters←→ Framed E1 service←→Framed Framed E1 service←→Framed


branch 2 (NE 1 to NE E1 port of the DM12←→DX1← E1 port of the DM12←→DX1
2) →cross-connect board←→line ←→cross-connect board←→
line

6-62 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

6.10.7 Planning Converged N x 64 kbit/s Services


The method of planning the converged N x 64 kbit/s services is defined.

Service Requirement
The headquarters of company A is located at NE 1 and two branches are located at NE 2. Each
branch needs to transmit an N x 64 kbit/s service to the headquarters.

Networking Application
The OptiX OSN 2500 can be used to meet the service requirement. The services from the two
branches are converged at NE 2 and then transmitted to the headquarters through NE 1. Figure
6-25 shows the networking diagram.

Figure 6-25 Networking diagram for the converged N x 64 kbit/s services


Department 1 of
A company A
Headquarters
4 x 64k
8 x 64k

4 x 64k
Department 2 of
company A
NE 1 NE 2

OptiX OSN equipment Enterprise user

Application Scheme
The DX1 board of NE 1 maps the 8 x 64 kbit/s service into a VC-12 and then transmits the
VC-12 to NE 2 through the SDH network.
The 64 kbit/s signals are separated from the SDH service at NE 2. The DX1 board of NE 2 then
converts 64 kbit/s signals into two 4 x 64 kbit/s services for the two branches.

Hardware Configuration
Configure one DX1 and one DM12 for NE 1 to access the 8 x 64 kbit/s service from the
headquarters of company A.
Configure one DX1 and one DM12 for NE 2 to access the 4 x 64 kbit/s service respectively from
the two branches of company A.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-63


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
6 Planning Services Planning Guidelines

Service Route

Table 6-36 Routes for the converged N x 64 kbit/s services


Route Position NE 1 NE 2

Heardquarters←→ 4 x 64 kbit/s service←→DDN of 4 x 64 kbit/s service←→DDN of


branch 1 (NE 1 to NE the DM12←→DX1 board←→ the DM12←→DX1 board←→
2) cross-connect board←→line cross-connect board←→line

Heardquarters←→ 4 x 64 kbit/s service←→DDN of 4 x 64 kbit/s service←→DDN of


branch 2 (NE 1 to NE the DM12←→DX1 board←→ the DM12←→DX1 board←→
2) cross-connect board←→line cross-connect board←→line

6.11 Planning WDM Services


The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple types of WDM services. When planning the WDM
services for different WDM boards, follow different principles.
6.11.1 Capability of Supporting WDM Services
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple types of WDM services.
6.11.2 Planning Principles
Different principles should be followed for different boards to plan the WDM services.

6.11.1 Capability of Supporting WDM Services


The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple types of WDM services.
l Any adjacent wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 can be added or dropped. The
working wavelength ranges from 1535.82 to 1560.61 nm and the spacing wavelength is
100 GHz.
l The client-side wavelengths can be converted from or to the standard wavelengths that
comply with ITU-T G.692. The signals are transparently transmitted.
For the OptiX OSN 2500, the boards that support the WDM services are as follows:
l N1MR2A, N1MR2C, TN11MR2, TN11MR4, TN11CMR2 and TN11CMR4, which are
optical add/drop multiplex boards
l N1LWX, which is an arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion board

The optical add/drop multiplex boards have the following features:


l Any adjacent standard wavelengths can be added or dropped. The optical signals are
transparently transmitted and the wavelength ranges from 1535.82 nm to 1560.61 nm.
l Each optical add/drop multiplex board can be used as an OTM or OADM node.
l Two MR2A boards can be cascaded to add or drop four wavelengths as an OTM node.
l Used with the LWX, each optical add/drop multiplex board can be used as an OADM node.
l The central wavelength complies with ITU-T Recommendations and the channel spacing
is 100 GHz.
The N1LWX, an arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion board, has the following features:

6-64 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 6 Planning Services

l The client-side wavelengths can be converted from or to the standard wavelengths that
comply with ITU-T G.692 (DWDM). The signals are transparently transmitted.
l The regeneration, retiming and reshaping (3R) functions are provided the client-side signals
within the range from 10 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s. For the signals, the clock is recovered and
the service rate is monitored.
l The central wavelength complies with ITU-T Recommendations and the channel spacing
is 100 GHz.
l Two types of LWX boards are provided. One type is dual-fed and selective receiving and
the other is single-fed and single receiving. A dual fed and selective receiving N1LWX
board supports intra-board protection, and one board of this type can realize optical channel
protection. The single fed and single receiving LWX boards support inter-board protection,
that is, 1+1 inter-board hot backup protection.

6.11.2 Planning Principles


Different principles should be followed for different boards to plan the WDM services.

N1MR2A, N1MR2C, TN11MR2, TN11MR4, TN11CMR2 and TN11CMR4


When using the N1MR2A, N1MR2C, TN11MR2, TN11MR4, TN11CMR2 and TN11CMR4,
adhere to the following planning principles:
l When two wavelengths are multiplexed, the maximum transmission distance is 100 km if
no optical booster amplifier board is used.
l When four wavelengths are multiplexed, the maximum transmission distance is 65 km if
no optical booster amplifier board is used.
l To increase the transmission distance, use optical booster amplifier boards at both the
receive end and the transmit end.
l When four wavelengths are multiplexed, the wavelengths are 1552.52 nm, 1551.72 nm,
1550.92 nm and 1550.12 nm. For the MR2, two adjacent wavelengths must be used.
l Control the input optical power for the MR2A and MR2C. When several wavelengths are
multiplexed, the input optical power should range from –2.7 dBm to –3.3 dBm. When a
single wavelength is multiplexed, the input optical power should range from –2.3 dBm to
–2.9 dBm. Use attenuators to increase or decrease the input or output optical power.
l The MR2A and MR2C share the same features. The width of the front panel of the two
boards is different and so the two boards are housed in different slots. For details on valid
slots for boards, see 10 Planning Hardware

LWX
When using the LWX board, adhere to the following principles:
l Choose the dual-fed and selective receiving or single-fed and single receiving type as
required.
l The LWX supports the 1+1 board-level protection. Configure the protection if necessary.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-65


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection

7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection

About This Chapter

For the OptiX OSN 2500, the capabilities of supporting the equipment-level protection and the
planning principles are defined.

7.1 Basic Principles


The basic principles for planning equipment-level protection are defined.
7.2 Capabilities of Supporting Equipment-Level Protection
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple equipment-level protection.
7.3 Planning the TPS Protection for the E1/T1 Service Boards
The principles for planning the protection for the E1/T1 service boards are defined.
7.4 Planning the TPS Protection for the E3/T3 Service Boards
The principles for planning the protection for the E3/T3 service boards are defined.
7.5 Planning the TPS Protection for the E4 Service Boards
The principles for planning the protection for E4 service boards are defined.
7.6 Planning the TPS Protection for the STM-1 Electrical Interface Service Boards
When planning the TPS protection for the STM-1 electrical interface service boards, consider
the capabilities of supporting the TPS protection and planning principles.
7.7 Planning the TPS Protection for the Ethernet Boards
When planning the TPS protection for the Ethernet boards, consider the capabilities of
supporting the TPS protection and planning principles.
7.8 Planning the BPS/PPS Protection for the Ethernet Boards
When planning the BPS/PPS protection for the Ethernet boards, consider the capabilities of
supporting the BPS/PPS protection and planning principles.
7.9 Planning the 1+1 Protection for the ATM Boards
When planning the 1+1 protection for the ATM boards, consider the capabilities of supporting
the 1+1 protection and planning principles.
7.10 Planning the TPS Protection for the DDN Service
The DDN is a type of low-rate data service. The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the TPS for the DDN
services.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection Planning Guidelines

7.11 Planning the TPS Protection for the Hybrid Service


Through rational planning, the OptiX OSN 2500 supports the coexistence of TPS protection
groups for different services, and thus the protection is effective.

7-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection

7.1 Basic Principles


The basic principles for planning equipment-level protection are defined.
Adhere to the following principles when planning equipment-level protection.
l Important boards, such as the power supply and cross-connect boards, need equipment-
level protection scheme.
l Important services need equipment-level protection.

7.2 Capabilities of Supporting Equipment-Level Protection


The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple equipment-level protection.
Table 7-1 lists the capabilities of the OptiX OSN 2500 of supporting equipment-level protection.

Table 7-1 Capabilities of supporting equipment-level protection


Protection Object Protection Scheme Configuration Revertive
Requirement or Non-
Revertive

–48 V power interface 1+1 backup Required. -


unit, PIU

Line, SCC, and cross- 1+1 backup Required. Non-


connect and timing revertive
board

E1/T1 service 1:N (N≤4) tributary See 7.3 Planning the Revertive
processing board protection switching TPS Protection for the
(TPS) E1/T1 Service Boards

E3/T3 service 1:1 TPS See 7.4 Planning the Revertive


processing board TPS Protection for the
E3/T3 Service Boards

E4 service processing 1:1 TPS See 7.5 Planning the Revertive


board TPS Protection for the
E4 Service Boards

STM-1 electrical 1:1 TPS See 7.6 Planning the Revertive


interface and service TPS Protection for the
processing board STM-1 Electrical
Interface Service
Boards

Ethernet service 1:1 TPS See 7.7 Planning the Revertive


processing boards, TPS Protection for the
N2EFS0 and N4EFS0 Ethernet Boards

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection Planning Guidelines

Protection Object Protection Scheme Configuration Revertive


Requirement or Non-
Revertive

Ethernet service 1+1 PPS and 1+1 BPS See 7.8 Planning the Non-
processing boards, BPS/PPS Protection for revertive
N1EMS4, N3EGS4 the Ethernet Boards
and N1EGS4

ATM service 1+1 backup See 7.9 Planning the 1+1 Non-
processing boards, Protection for the ATM revertive
N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 Boards

DDN service 1:N (N≤4) TPS See 7.10 Planning the Revertive
processing board, TPS Protection for the
N1DX1 DDN Service

WDM service 1+1 backup Optional. Non-


processing board, revertive
N1LWX

3.3 V power of boards 1:N centralized backup Not needed. -


(supported by default)

NOTE

Using the power backup unit on the Q1SAP or Q2SAP board, the OptiX OSN 2500 provides reliable power
backup for the +3.3 V power supply of other boards, including the SCC and service boards.

7.3 Planning the TPS Protection for the E1/T1 Service Boards
The principles for planning the protection for the E1/T1 service boards are defined.
7.3.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the E1/T1 Service Boards
When planning the TPS protection for the E1/T1 service boards, consider the capabilities of
supporting the TPS protection.
7.3.2 Planning Principles
When planning the TPS protection for the E1/T1 services, follow the basic principles.
7.3.3 Planning Cases
A case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the E1/T1 services.

7.3.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the E1/T1


Service Boards
When planning the TPS protection for the E1/T1 service boards, consider the capabilities of
supporting the TPS protection.
The N1PQ1, N2PQ1 and N1PQM boards for the OptiX OSN 2500 all support one 1:N (N≤4)
TPS protection group for the E1/T1 service. When the slots on the subrack of the OptiX OSN
2500 are divided, the R1PD1 and R2PD1 boards support two 1:N (N≤2) TPS protection groups
for the E1 service.

7-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection

NOTE
The N1PQ1 and N2PQ1 boards do not support T1 services.

7.3.2 Planning Principles


When planning the TPS protection for the E1/T1 services, follow the basic principles.
l Determine whether to configure the TPS protection according to the importance of the
services.
l When configuring the TPS protection for the E1/T1 service, select the N1PQM board as
the processing board, and select the D12S as the interface board.
l If the TPS protection is required for the E1 service after the slots of the subrack are divided,
select the R1PD1 or R2PD1 as the processing board, and the D75S or D12S as the interface
board.
l The slot for the protection board is slot 5. The slots for the working boards are slots 6–7,
and 12–13.
l When the slots on the subrack are divided, two 1:N (N≤2) TPS protection groups for the
E1 service can be configured as follows:
– For the protection group 1, the slot for the protection board is slot 5, and the slots for
the working boards are slots 6–7.
– For the protection group 2, the slot for the protection board is slot 19, and the slots for
the working boards are slots 20–21.

7.3.3 Planning Cases


A case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the E1/T1 services.
Figure 7-1 shows the configuration of a 1:4 TPS protection group for the E1/T1 service before
the slots are divided.

Figure 7-1 TPS configuration for the E1/T1 service before the division of slots

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
PQ1/PQM (W)
PQ1/PQM (W)

PQ1/PQM (W)
PQ1/PQM (W)
PQ1/PQM (P)
D12S
D12S
D12S
D12S

D12S
D12S
D12S
D12S
CXL16
CXL16

SAP

Fiber Routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
(SLOT22) (SLOT24) (SLOT25) (SLOT23)
P: Protection board W: Working board

Figure 7-2 shows the configuration of a 1:2 TPS protection group for the E1 service after the
slots are divided.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection Planning Guidelines

Figure 7-2 TPS configuration for the E1 service after the division of slots

S S S
S S S S 19 20 21 S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

PD1 (W)
PD1 (W)
PD1 (P)
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

S S S
D12S/D75S
D12S/D75S
D12S/D75S
D12S/D75S 5 6 7

CXL16
CXL16

SAP
PD1 (W)
PD1 (W)
PD1 (P)

Fiber Routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
(SLOT22) (SLOT24) (SLOT25) (SLOT23)
P: Protection board W: Working board

7.4 Planning the TPS Protection for the E3/T3 Service Boards
The principles for planning the protection for the E3/T3 service boards are defined.
7.4.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the E3/T3 Service Boards
When planning the TPS protection for the E3/T3 service boards, consider the capabilities of
supporting the TPS protection.
7.4.2 Planning Principles
When planning the TPS protection for the E3/T3 service boards, consider the capabilities of
supporting the TPS protection.
7.4.3 Planning Cases
A case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the E3/T3 services.

7.4.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the E3/T3


Service Boards
When planning the TPS protection for the E3/T3 service boards, consider the capabilities of
supporting the TPS protection.

The E3/T3 service boards for the OptiX OSN 2500, such as the N1PD3, N2PD3, N1PL3, N2PL3,
and N2PQ3 support two 1:1 TPS protection groups.

7.4.2 Planning Principles


When planning the TPS protection for the E3/T3 service boards, consider the capabilities of
supporting the TPS protection.

l Determine whether to configure the TPS protection according to the importance of the
services.
l Configure the TPS protection for the E3/T3 service.

7-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection

– Choose the N1PD3, N2PD3, N1PL3, or N2PL3 as the processing board, N1C34S as
the interface board, and N1TSB8 or N1TSB4 as the switching and bridging board.
– Choose the N2PQ3 as the processing board, N1D34S as the interface board, and
N1TSB8 as the switching and bridging board.
l When the N1PL3 is the working board, the protection board can be the N1PD3 or N2PD3.
l When the slot for the protection board is slot 6, the slot for the working board is slot 7.
When the slot for the protection board is slot 13, the slot for the working board is slot 12.

7.4.3 Planning Cases


A case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the E3/T3 services.
Figure 7-3 shows the configuration of two 1:1 TPS protection groups for the E3/T3 service
boards, such as the N1PD3, N2PD3, N1PL3, and N2PL3.

Figure 7-3 Configuration of the TPS protection for the E3/T3 service (1)

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
PD3/PL3(W)
PD3/PL3(W)
PD3/PL3(P)

PD3/PL3(P)
D34S/C34S

D34S/C34S
CXL16
CXL16
TSB8

TSB8
SAP

Fiber Routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
(SLOT22) (SLOT24) (SLOT25) (SLOT23)
P: Protection board W: Working board

Figure 7-4 shows the configuration of two 1:1 TPS protection groups for the N2PQ3 E3/T3
service board.

NOTE

When configuring the TPS protection for the N2PQ3 board, use two N1TSB8 boards to work with the
N2PQ3 board.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection Planning Guidelines

Figure 7-4 Configuration of the TPS protection for the E3/T3 service (2)

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

PQ3(W)

PQ3(W)
PQ3(P)

PQ3(P)
CXL16

CXL16
TSB8
TSB8

TSB8
TSB8
D34S
D34S

D34S
D34S
SAP
Fiber Routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
(SLOT22) (SLOT24) (SLOT25) (SLOT23)
P: Protection board W: Working board

7.5 Planning the TPS Protection for the E4 Service Boards


The principles for planning the protection for E4 service boards are defined.
7.5.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the E4 Service Boards
When planning the TPS protection for the E4 service boards, consider the capabilities of
supporting the TPS protection.
7.5.2 Planning Principles
When planning the TPS protection for the E4 services, follow the basic principles.
7.5.3 Planning Cases
A case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the E4 services.

7.5.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the E4


Service Boards
When planning the TPS protection for the E4 service boards, consider the capabilities of
supporting the TPS protection.

The E4 service boards for the OptiX OSN 2500, such as the N1SPQ4 and N2SPQ4, support two
1:1 TPS protection groups.

7.5.2 Planning Principles


When planning the TPS protection for the E4 services, follow the basic principles.

l Determine whether to configure the TPS protection according to the importance of the
services.
l When the slot for the protection board is slot 6, the slot for the working board is slot 7.
When the slot for the protection board is slot 13, the slot for the working board is slot 12.

7-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection

7.5.3 Planning Cases


A case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the E4 services.

Figure 7-5 shows the configuration of two 1:3 TPS protection groups for the E4 service.

Figure 7-5 TPS configuration for the E4 service

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SPQ4(W)
SPQ4(W)
SPQ4(P)

SPQ4(P)
CXL16
CXL16
MU04

MU04
TSB8

TSB8
SAP
Fiber Routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
(SLOT22) (SLOT24) (SLOT25) (SLOT23)
P: Protection board W: Working board

7.6 Planning the TPS Protection for the STM-1 Electrical


Interface Service Boards
When planning the TPS protection for the STM-1 electrical interface service boards, consider
the capabilities of supporting the TPS protection and planning principles.
7.6.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the STM-1 Electrical Interface Service
Boards
The N1SEP, the STM-1 service board for the OptiX OSN 2500, supports two 1:1 TPS protection
groups.
7.6.2 Planning Principles
When planing the TPS protection for the STM-1 electrical interface service boards, follow the
basic principles.
7.6.3 Planning Cases
A case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the STM-1 electrical interface service
boards.

7.6.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the STM-1


Electrical Interface Service Boards
The N1SEP, the STM-1 service board for the OptiX OSN 2500, supports two 1:1 TPS protection
groups.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection Planning Guidelines

7.6.2 Planning Principles


When planing the TPS protection for the STM-1 electrical interface service boards, follow the
basic principles.
Adhere to the following principles when planning the TPS protection for the STM-1 electrical
interface service boards.
l Determine whether to configure the TPS according to the importance of the services.
l When the N1SEP1 board works with the interface board to provide optical interfaces,
choose the N1SEP.
l When configuring the TPS protection group for the STM-1 electrical interface service
board, choose the N1SEP as the processing board, N1EU08 as the interface board, and
N1TSB8 or N1TSB4 as the switching and bridging board.
l When the slot for the protection board is slot 6, the slot for the working board is slot 7.
When the slot for the protection board is slot 13, the slot for the working board is slot 12.

7.6.3 Planning Cases


A case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the STM-1 electrical interface service
boards.
Figure 7-6 shows the configuration of two 1:1 TPS protection groups for the STM-1 electrical
interface service boards.

Figure 7-6 TPS configuration for the STM-1 electrical interface service boards

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
SEP(W)

SEP(W)
SEP(P)

SEP(P)
TSB8

CXL16
CXL16
EU08

TSB8
EU08
SAP

Fiber routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
(SLOT22) (SLOT24) (SLOT25) (SLOT23)

P: Protection board W: Working board

7.7 Planning the TPS Protection for the Ethernet Boards


When planning the TPS protection for the Ethernet boards, consider the capabilities of
supporting the TPS protection and planning principles.
7.7.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the Ethernet Boards
The N2EFS0 and N4EFS0 boards for the OptiX OSN 2500 support a 1:1 TPS protection group.

7-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection

7.7.2 Planning Principles


When planing the TPS protection for the Ethernet boards, follow the basic principles.
7.7.3 Planning Cases
A case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the Ethernet boards.

7.7.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the Ethernet


Boards
The N2EFS0 and N4EFS0 boards for the OptiX OSN 2500 support a 1:1 TPS protection group.

7.7.2 Planning Principles


When planing the TPS protection for the Ethernet boards, follow the basic principles.

Adhere to the following principles when planning the TPS protection for the Ethernet boards.

l Determine whether to configure the TPS protection according to the importance of the
services.
l When configuring the TPS protection group for the Ethernet service boards, choose the
N2EFS0 or N4EFS0 as the processing board, N1ETS8 as the interface board, and N1TSB8
as the switching and bridging board.
l The slot for the protection board is slot 13. The slot for the working board is slot 12.

7.7.3 Planning Cases


A case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the Ethernet boards.

Figure 7-7 shows the configuration of a 1:1 TPS protection group for the EFS0 board.

Figure 7-7 TPS configuration for the Ethernet boards

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
EFS0(W)
EFS0(P)
CXL16

CXL16

TSB8
ETS8
SAP

Fiber Routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
(SLOT22) (SLOT24) (SLOT25) (SLOT23)

P: Protection board W: Working board

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection Planning Guidelines

7.8 Planning the BPS/PPS Protection for the Ethernet Boards


When planning the BPS/PPS protection for the Ethernet boards, consider the capabilities of
supporting the BPS/PPS protection and planning principles.
7.8.1 Capabilities of Supporting the BPS/PPS Protection for the Ethernet Boards
The N1EMS4, N1EGS4 and N3EGS4 boards for the OptiX OSN 2500 support the BPS or PPS
protection.
7.8.2 Planning Principles
When planing the BPS and PPS protection for the Ethernet boards, follow the basic principles.
7.8.3 Planning Cases
A case is given to show how to plan the BPS/PPS protection for the Ethernet boards.

7.8.1 Capabilities of Supporting the BPS/PPS Protection for the


Ethernet Boards
The N1EMS4, N1EGS4 and N3EGS4 boards for the OptiX OSN 2500 support the BPS or PPS
protection.

l The BPS protection, which mainly uses an active board and a standby board, is based on
boards.
l The PPS protection, which mainly uses an active board and a standby board, is based on
ports between boards

7.8.2 Planning Principles


When planing the BPS and PPS protection for the Ethernet boards, follow the basic principles.

l Determine whether to configure the BPS or PPS protection according to the importance of
the services.
l The BPS and PPS protection schemes cannot be configured for the EMS4 or EGS4 board
at the same time.
l When the BPS or PPS protection switching occurs, the following requirements should be
met:
– The equipment interconnected to the protection group should share the same working
mode as that of the protection group.
– The transmit end and the receive end should be connected by optical fibers or crossover
cables. The two ends should not be connected by other equipment.
– Before the protection group is deleted at the receive end, do not change the working
mode. Otherwise, the protection group works abnormally.
l When configuring the BPS/PPS protection for the Ethernet boards, choose the N1EMS4,
N1EGS4 or N3EGS4 as the processing board. If an interface board is required, use the
N1ETF8 or N1EFF8.
l The access capacity of the slot for the protection board should equal or exceed that of the
slot for the working board.
l The optical interface board for the protection board and the working board should be the
same.

7-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection

l Compared with the BPS protection, the PPS protection reduces the effect on the external
system and the network.

7.8.3 Planning Cases


A case is given to show how to plan the BPS/PPS protection for the Ethernet boards.
Figure 7-8 shows the configuration of the BPS protection for the EMS4 board and the
configuration of the PPS protection for the EGS4 board. In the case of the EMS4, the slot for
the protection board is slot 7, and the slot for the working board is slot 6. In the case of the EGS4,
the slot for the protection board is slot 13, and the slot for the working board is slot 12.

Figure 7-8 Configuration of the BPS and PPS protection schemes for the EMS4 and EGS4
boards

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T
1 T 1
1 T 1
T T
1 T T 1
1 1 T 1
T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
EMS4 (W)

EGS4 (W)
EMS4 (P)

EGS4 (P)
CXL16
CXL16
ETF8
ETF8
ETF8
ETF8

SAP

Fiber Routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
(SLOT22) (SLOT24) (SLOT25) (SLOT23)
P: Protection board W: Working board

7.9 Planning the 1+1 Protection for the ATM Boards


When planning the 1+1 protection for the ATM boards, consider the capabilities of supporting
the 1+1 protection and planning principles.
7.9.1 Capabilities of Supporting the 1+1 Protection for the ATM Boards
When planning the 1+1 protection for the ATM boards, consider the capabilities of supporting
the 1+1 protection.
7.9.2 Planning Principles
When planing the 1+1 protection for the ATM boards, follow the basic principles.
7.9.3 Planning Cases
A case is given to show how to plan the 1+1 protection for the ATM boards.

7.9.1 Capabilities of Supporting the 1+1 Protection for the ATM


Boards
When planning the 1+1 protection for the ATM boards, consider the capabilities of supporting
the 1+1 protection.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection Planning Guidelines

The N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards for the OptiX OSN 2500 all support the 1+1 protection.

7.9.2 Planning Principles


When planing the 1+1 protection for the ATM boards, follow the basic principles.

l Determine whether to configure the TPS protection according to the importance of the
services.
l When configuring the 1+1 protection for the ATM boards, choose the N1IDL4, N1IDQ1
as the processing board.
l When using the 1+1 protection, the protection and working boards should be inserted into
paired slots.

7.9.3 Planning Cases


A case is given to show how to plan the 1+1 protection for the ATM boards.

Figure 7-9 shows the configuration of the 1+1 protection for the ATM boards. The IDL4 boards
housed in slots 3 and 16 serve as a mutual backup for each other. The IDQ1 boards housed in
slots 7 and 12 serve as a mutual backup for each other. The IDQ1 boards housed in slots 8 and
11 serve as a mutual backup for each other.

Figure 7-9 Configuration of the 1+1 protection for the ATM boards

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
IDL4 (W)
IDQ1(W)
IDL4 (P)
IDQ1(P)

CXL16
CXL16

SAP

Fiber Routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
(SLOT22) (SLOT24) (SLOT25) (SLOT23)
P: Protection board W: Working board

7.10 Planning the TPS Protection for the DDN Service


The DDN is a type of low-rate data service. The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the TPS for the DDN
services.
7.10.1 Planning the TPS Protection for the DDN Service
For the OptiX OSN 2500, when planning the TPS protection for the DDN service, first consider
the capabilities of supporting the TPS protection for the DDN service.
7.10.2 Planning Principles

7-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection

To rationally and effectively plan the TPS protection for the DDN service, the basic planning
principles should be followed.
7.10.3 Planning Cases
A case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the DDN service.

7.10.1 Planning the TPS Protection for the DDN Service


For the OptiX OSN 2500, when planning the TPS protection for the DDN service, first consider
the capabilities of supporting the TPS protection for the DDN service.

The N1DX1 board for the OptiX OSN 2500 supports one 1:N (N≤4) TPS protection group.

7.10.2 Planning Principles


To rationally and effectively plan the TPS protection for the DDN service, the basic planning
principles should be followed.

l Determine whether to configure the TPS protection according to the importance of the
services.
l When configuring the TPS protection for the DDN service, choose the N1DX1 as the
processing board, and N1DM12 as the interface board.
l The slot for the protection board is slot 5. The slots for the working boards are slots 6 -7,
and 12 - 13.

7.10.3 Planning Cases


A case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the DDN service.

Figure 7-10 shows the configuration of a 1:4 TPS protection group for the DDN service.

Figure 7-10 TPS configuration for the DDN service

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
DX1(W)
DX1(W)

DX1(W)
DX1(W)
DX1(P)

CXL16

CXL16
DM12
DM12
DM12
DM12

DM12
DM12
DM12
DM12
SAP

Fiber Routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
(SLOT22) (SLOT24) (SLOT25) (SLOT23)

P: Protection board W: Working board

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection Planning Guidelines

7.11 Planning the TPS Protection for the Hybrid Service


Through rational planning, the OptiX OSN 2500 supports the coexistence of TPS protection
groups for different services, and thus the protection is effective.
7.11.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the Hybrid Service
For the OpitX OSN 2500, when planning the TPS protection for the hybrid service, first consider
the capabilities of supporting the TPS protection.
7.11.2 Planning Principles
To rationally and effectively plan the TPS protection for the hybrid service, the planning
principles should be followed.
7.11.3 Planning Cases
A case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the hybrid service.

7.11.1 Capabilities of Supporting the TPS Protection for the Hybrid


Service
For the OpitX OSN 2500, when planning the TPS protection for the hybrid service, first consider
the capabilities of supporting the TPS protection.
The OptiX OSN 2500 supports the configuration of the TPS protection for the hybrid service.
When the slots meet the requirements, the TPS protection groups can coexist in any two of the
service types, such as E1/T1, E3/T3, E4, STM-1, Ethernet, or DDN.

7.11.2 Planning Principles


To rationally and effectively plan the TPS protection for the hybrid service, the planning
principles should be followed.
l Determine which service board should be configured with the TPS protection first
according to the importance of the services.
l Determine which board slot should be used according to the principles for planning the
services.

7.11.3 Planning Cases


A case is given to show how to plan the TPS protection for the hybrid service.
Figure 7-11 shows an example when two different types of TPS protection groups coexist.
l In the case of the E1/T1 service, the slot for the protection board is slot 5, and the slots for
the working boards are slots 6, and 7.
l In the case of the STM-1 (electrical signal) service, the slot for the protection board is slot
13, and the slot for the working board is slot 12.

7-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 7 Planning Equipment-Level Protection

Figure 7-11 TPS configuration for the hybrid service

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

PQ1/PQM (W)
PQ1/PQM (W)
PQ1/PQM (P)
D12S/D75S
D12S/D75S
D12S/D75S
D12S/D75S

CXL16

CXL16

SEP (W)

TSB8
EU04
SEP (P)
SAP
Fiber routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
(SLOT22) (SLOT24) (SLOT25) (SLOT23)

P: Protection board W: Working board

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 8 Planning Clocks

8 Planning Clocks

About This Chapter

The OptiX OSN 2500 supports multiple clock modes, and provides the clock protection
switching in multiple ways. When planning the clocks, follow the basic principles and choose
different clock configuration for different network types.
8.1 Basic Principles
When planning the clocks in the network, follow the basic principles.
8.2 Capabilities of Supporting Clocks
The clocks supported by the equipment and the clock protection are defined.
8.3 Planning Examples
Examples are given to show how to configure clocks in the chain, tangent ring, and intersecting
ring networks.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
8 Planning Clocks Planning Guidelines

8.1 Basic Principles


When planning the clocks in the network, follow the basic principles.

l At the backbone and convergence layers, use the clock protection and configure the active
and standby reference clock sources to perform the clock switching. At the access layer, in
normal situations, configure one reference clock source at the central station. Clocks at
other stations follow the clock at the central station.
l Central nodes or nodes with high reliability can provide clock sources.
l When the building integrated timing supply system (BITS) or other external clock
equipment with high precision is provided, the NE should use the external timing mode.
When no BITS or other external clock equipment with high precision is provided, the NE
should use the line timing mode. The internal timing mode should be used as the lowest
clock tracing level.
l Properly plan the clock synchronization network to avoid interlocked clocks and clock
loops.
l The shortest route requirements for the line clock tracing are as follows:
– In the case of the ring network composed of less than six NEs, the reference clock source
is traced in one direction.
– In the case of the ring network composed of six or more than six NEs, the line clock
tracing should follow the shortest route. Thus, in the case of the network composed of
N NEs, N/2 NEs trace the reference clock source in one direction and the other N/2 NEs
trace the reference clock source in another direction.
l When multiple clocks form a long chain, clock compensation is required. In this case, the
number of the G.812 secondary clocks on the transmission link should not exceed 10. The
number of the G.813 clocks between two G.812 secondary clocks should not exceed 20.
The number of G.813 clocks between the G.811 clock and the G.812 clock should not
exceed 20. The number of G.813 clocks should not exceed 60.
l When the synchronization status message (SSM) is not enabled, do not configure the clocks
into a loop on the local NE.
l The attenuation of the received SSM should be within a specific range. If the attenuation
is out of the range, the SSM cannot be received.
l Use the clock extracted from STM-N signals as the inter-office clock. Do not use the
tributary signal timing.

8.2 Capabilities of Supporting Clocks


The clocks supported by the equipment and the clock protection are defined.

Basic Functions
OptiX OSN 2500 have the following functions:

l Tracing of the external clock source, line clock source, tributary clock source and internal
clock source.
l Non-SSM, standard SSM and extended SSM.

8-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 8 Planning Clocks

l Clock working modes compliant with ITU-T G.781, such as locked, hold-over, and free
run.
l Output of the line clock, tributary clock and external clock.
l Tributray re-timing.
l ASON clock tracing scheme.

Clock Protection
OptiX OSN 2500 can realize the clock protection switching in the following ways:
l Do not enable the SSM, and then perform the clock source selection and switching
according to the priority list. In this case, do not configure two clocks in two directions on
one NE into the priority list. Otherwise, the clocks form a loop.
l Enable the standard SSM mode, and then configure the priority list to ensure that the OptiX
OSN 2500 can automatically select the clock source with the highest priority to avoid the
locked loop.
l Enable the extended SSM mode. Use the fifth to eighth bits of the S1 byte to define the
quality of the clock source, and use the first to fourth bits of the S1 byte to define the clock
source ID. Thus, the clock loop can be avoided. The principles for setting the clock IDs are
as follows:
– All external BITSs should be assigned with clock IDs.
– In the case of nodes with external BITSs, the internal clocks of these nodes should be
assigned with clock IDs.
– In the case of nodes that access the chain or ring network to another ring network, the
clock sources of these nodes should be assigned with clock IDs.
– In the case of nodes that access the chain or ring network to another ring network, when
the clock tracing level includes the line clock source, the line clock sources accessed to
another ring network should be assigned with clock IDs.

8.3 Planning Examples


Examples are given to show how to configure clocks in the chain, tangent ring, and intersecting
ring networks.

Configure Clocks in the Chain Network


When the SSM is enabled, clocks are not interlocked in the chain network. When there are more
than 20 nodes, add the BITS clocks for compensation. See Figure 8-1.

Figure 8-1 Configuration of clocks in the chain network

Node 1 Node 2 Node 21 Node N


... ...

BITS Compensation
BITS
Clock tracing

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
8 Planning Clocks Planning Guidelines

Configure Clocks in the Tangent Ring Network


In the case of the tangent rings, configure a BITS clock at the tangent node as the reference clock
source of the network. See Figure 8-2.

Figure 8-2 Configuration of clocks in the tangent rings network

BITS

Clock tracing

Configure Clocks in the Intersecting Ring Network


In the case of the intersecting rings, configure an active BITS clock at one of the junction nodes
as the reference clock source of the network. Configure a standby BITS clock at another junction
node to perform the clock active/standby switching. See Figure 8-3.

Figure 8-3 Configuration of clocks in the intersecting rings network

BITS

Standby
BITS
Clock tracing

8-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 9 Planning Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces

9 Planning Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces

About This Chapter

The planning of orderwire and auxiliary interfaces is defined, and a planning example is given.

9.1 Planning Orderwire Phone Interfaces


The capabilities of supporting orderwire phone interfaces are defined, and the process of
planning the orderwire phone interface is defined according to the planning principles.
9.2 Planning Broadcast Data Interfaces S1–S4
The broadcast data interfaces are S1–S4.
9.3 Planning External Alarm Interfaces
The planning of the external alarm interfaces is defined.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
9 Planning Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces Planning Guidelines

9.1 Planning Orderwire Phone Interfaces


The capabilities of supporting orderwire phone interfaces are defined, and the process of
planning the orderwire phone interface is defined according to the planning principles.
9.1.1 Capability of Supporting Orderwire Phone Interfaces
The capability of supporting orderwire phone interfaces is defined.
9.1.2 Planning Principles
The principles for planning the orderwire phone interfaces are defined.
9.1.3 Planning Example
An example is given to show how to plan the orderwire phone interfaces.

9.1.1 Capability of Supporting Orderwire Phone Interfaces


The capability of supporting orderwire phone interfaces is defined.

The Q1SEI board of the OptiX OSN 2500 provides one orderwire phone interface, two NNI
voice interfaces and two NNI signaling interfaces. The five interfaces are all of the RJ-45 type.

9.1.2 Planning Principles


The principles for planning the orderwire phone interfaces are defined.

Adhere to the following principles when planning orderwire phone interfaces:

l Make sure that the orderwire signaling is compatible in the entire network.
l Make sure the orderwire phone number of each node is of the same length. It is
recommended that the orderwire phone number be set as four characters.
l Set the orderwire phone number in the format: subnet number (one character) + user number
(three characters).
l Make sure that the conference phone numbers in the entire network are the same and the
number should be larger than the orderwire phone number. It is recommended that the
conference phone number be set to 9999.
l Make sure that all orderwire phone numbers in the entire network, except the conference
phone number, are unique.
l Make sure that the dial-up scheme of the orderwire phone of each node is dual-tone multi-
frequency.
l Make sure the call waiting time of each node is the same. If less than 30 nodes are present
in the network, set the call waiting time to 5s. If more than 30 nodes are present in the
network, set the call waiting time to 9s.
l The orderwire phone number should increase as the node ID increases.
l Consider the possibility of howl in the orderwire loop. Release the loop to solve the problem
of howl in the conference phone. The loop is automatically released, if an OptiX OSN 2500
system is networked with other OptiX OSN 2500 systems, or with the OptiX OSN 7500,
OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 3500T, OptiX OSN 2500REG and the OptiX OSN 1500. If
the OptiX OSN 2500 is networked with other equipment, manually release the loop.
l If no optical path is available between two nodes, which, however, require orderwire
communication, use the orderwire NNI connection for the orderwire communication. Use

9-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 9 Planning Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces

Voice 1 or Voice 2 as the voice interface, and Serial 3 or Serial 4 as the data interface for
the orderwire NNI connection.

9.1.3 Planning Example


An example is given to show how to plan the orderwire phone interfaces.

Figure 9-1 shows how to plan the orderwire phone interfaces.

Set the orderwire phone number as four characters, with the last two characters being the same
as the node ID. The conference phone number has four characters and is 9999.

Figure 9-1 Planning the orderwire phone interfaces


Node 01
Phone: 1001
Node 02 Node 04
Phone: 1002 Phone: 1004
Node 54
Phone: 1054
Ring 1
Node 20 Node 03
Phone: 1020 Ring 2 Phone: 1003
Ring 5

Node 21
Phone: 1021 Ring 3 Ring 4 Node 53
Phone: 1053

Node 31
Phone: 1031 Node 43
Node 32 Node 41 Phone: 1043
Phone: 1032 Phone: 1041
Meeting number: 9999

9.2 Planning Broadcast Data Interfaces S1–S4


The broadcast data interfaces are S1–S4.
9.2.1 Capability of Supporting Broadcast Data Interfaces
The capability of supporting broadcast data interfaces is defined.
9.2.2 Planning Principles
The principles for planning the broadcast data interfaces are defined.
9.2.3 Planning Example
An example is given to show how to plan the data broadcast interface.

9.2.1 Capability of Supporting Broadcast Data Interfaces


The capability of supporting broadcast data interfaces is defined.

The broadcast data interfaces can be used for universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter
(UART) full-duplex communication.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
9 Planning Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces Planning Guidelines

The Q1SEI board of the OptiX OSN 2500 provides four broadcast data interfaces S1–S4, which
are of the RJ-45 type.

The S1–S4 interfaces must provide two level interfaces, RS-232 and RS-422. The RS-232
interface complies with the ITU-T V.24/V.28 Recommendations for interfaces. The RS-422
interface complies with the ITU-T V.11 Recommendations for interfaces.

The data is transparently transmitted by the broadcast data interface. No interface rate and
transmission control protocol needs to be specified. The interface rate is no more than 19.2 kbit/
s.

The broadcast data interfaces S1–S4 can be connected to the data terminal equipment. The data
of the data terminal equipment can then be transmitted in the SDH network in a point-to-point
or point-to-multipoint manner. In this way, data can be broadcast to several optical interfaces.

9.2.2 Planning Principles


The principles for planning the broadcast data interfaces are defined.

Adhere to the following principles when planning broadcast data interfaces:

l The configured broadcast data interfaces should not form a loop.


l Do not configure the unused optical interfaces into the broadcast domain for the broadcast
interface.
l Do not configure the NE where the broadcast interface is not used, into the broadcast
domain.
l Make sure the data flows in the same direction as the clock tracing.

If the equipment at the opposite end uses the RS-232 interface to connect to the broadcast data
interface of the OptiX OSN 2500, this equipment should meet the following requirements:

l The interface is of the RS-232 level.


l The maximum rate should not exceed 19.2 kbit/s.
l The interface should be of the RS-232 high level (–9 V).
l Use the software to ensure that only one slave node can transmit data to the master node at
any time.
l The cables should not be longer than 15 m.

If the equipment at the opposite end uses the RS-422 interface to connect to the broadcast data
interface of the OptiX OSN 2500, this equipment should meet the following requirements:

l The interface is of the RS-422 level.


l The maximum rate should not exceed 19.2 kbit/s.
l Use the software to ensure that only one slave node can transmit data to the master node at
any time.
l The cables should not be longer than 1 km.

9.2.3 Planning Example


An example is given to show how to plan the data broadcast interface.

9-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 9 Planning Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces

Service Requirement
As shown in Figure 9-2, NE 2, NE 3 and NE 4 are equipped with environment monitors, and
NE 1 is equipped with a monitoring computer (master node). The monitoring computer needs
to communicate with the environment monitor (slave node) of NE 2–NE 4 through the OptiX
OSN 2500. The monitoring computer broadcasts commands to the environment monitors of NE
2–NE 4. The environment monitors of NE 2–NE 4 report the collected data to the monitoring
computer.

Application Scheme
Figure 9-2 shows an application scheme.

Figure 9-2 Application of the broadcast data interfaces


Monitoring
computer

NE1

Two-fiber
bidirectional NE4
Environment NE2 MSP ring Environment
monitor monitor

NE3

OptiX OSN 2500

Data flow
Environment
monitor

NE 1–NE 4 all use the broadcast data interface S1 to connect to the monitoring computer or
environment monitor, and use optical interface boards to transmit data to the SDH network.
NE 1 connects the monitoring computer through the S1 interface. NE 1 then transmits the data
that is received by the S1 interface to the west and east NEs. In the converse direction, the west
and east NEs transmit data to NE 1, which then transmits the data through the S1 interface. In
this way, at any time, only one environment monitor can transmit data.

9.3 Planning External Alarm Interfaces


The planning of the external alarm interfaces is defined.
9.3.1 Capability of Supporting External Alarm Interfaces
The capability of supporting external alarm interfaces is defined.
9.3.2 Planning Principles
The principles for planning the external alarm interfaces are defined.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
9 Planning Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces Planning Guidelines

9.3.1 Capability of Supporting External Alarm Interfaces


The capability of supporting external alarm interfaces is defined.
The SEI board of the OptiX OSN 2500 supports the following external alarm interfaces:
l Eight alarm input interfaces, which are used to access the alarm signals from external
equipment.
l Four alarm output interfaces, which are used to output the alarm signals of the local NE.
l Four alarm concatenation interfaces, which are used to concatenate the alarm signals of
several NEs.
Use RJ-45 connectors for the external alarm interfaces.

9.3.2 Planning Principles


The principles for planning the external alarm interfaces are defined.
The external alarm input interfaces are used for monitoring the environment of the equipment
room. The alarm signals are transmitted to the T2000 or a central alarm monitoring equipment
through these interfaces.
Generally, the external alarm output interfaces are used to transmit the alarm signals of NEs to
the central alarm monitor equipment.
On the T2000, you can set the alarm trigger mode for each alarm to Enabled or Disabled. In
either mode, alarms are reported.

9-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 10 Planning Hardware

10 Planning Hardware

About This Chapter

The planning for the cabinet, slots, and interfaces is defined.

10.1 Planning the Cabinet


The appearance and specifications of the cabinet, and the principles for planning the cabinet are
defined.
10.2 Planning Slots for Boards
The slot layout in the subrack, the mapping relation between the board and slot, and the principles
for the slots are defined.
10.3 Planning Interface Boards
The interfaces for each board and the principles for planning the interfaces are defined.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
10 Planning Hardware Planning Guidelines

10.1 Planning the Cabinet


The appearance and specifications of the cabinet, and the principles for planning the cabinet are
defined.

10.1.1 Cabinet
The OptiX OSN 2500 can be installed in an ETSI cabinet or a 19-inch standard cabinet.
10.1.2 Planning Principles
When choosing a cabinet, consider the internal height of the equipment room, height of the
combined cabinet, and subrack quantity.

10.1.1 Cabinet
The OptiX OSN 2500 can be installed in an ETSI cabinet or a 19-inch standard cabinet.
Figure 10-1 shows an ETSI cabinet that is 300 mm deep.

10-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 10 Planning Hardware

Figure 10-1 Appearance of the ETSI cabinet

W D

Table 10-1 lists the technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets.

Table 10-1 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets

Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Allowed Subrack


Quantity

600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) 55 2

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H) 79 2

600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H) 60 3

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H) 84 3

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
10 Planning Hardware Planning Guidelines

Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Allowed Subrack


Quantity

600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2600 (H) 70 4

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2600 (H) 94 4


NOTE
All dimensions are in mm. The following figure shows the directions of the width, the depth and the height.
H

W
D

Table 10-2 lists the technical specifications of the 19-inch standard cabinets.

Table 10-2 Technical specifications of the 19-inch standard cabinets

Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)

600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) 90

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H) 110

10.1.2 Planning Principles


When choosing a cabinet, consider the internal height of the equipment room, height of the
combined cabinet, and subrack quantity.

Consider the following factors when you choose a cabinet for the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack:

l Internal height of the equipment room


l Height of the combined cabinet
l Subrack quantity

10.2 Planning Slots for Boards


The slot layout in the subrack, the mapping relation between the board and slot, and the principles
for the slots are defined.

10.2.1 Slot Allocation


The OptiX OSN 2500 subrack has only one layer. The left portion and right portion of the
subrack, where eight slots are present, are slot areas for interface boards. The middle portion of
the subrack, where ten slots are present, is the slot area for processing boards.
10.2.2 Planning Principles
The basic principles for planning the slots and the slots supported by the equipment are defined.

10-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 10 Planning Hardware

10.2.1 Slot Allocation


The OptiX OSN 2500 subrack has only one layer. The left portion and right portion of the
subrack, where eight slots are present, are slot areas for interface boards. The middle portion of
the subrack, where ten slots are present, is the slot area for processing boards.

Figure 10-2 shows the slot layout of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack.

Figure 10-3 shows the slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500.

Slots 5–7 in the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack can be divided into half-height slots.

Figure 10-2 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack (before the division of slots)

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
processing board
processing board
processing board
processing board

processing board
processing board
processing board
interface board

interface board
interface board
interface board

interface board

interface board
interface board
interface board
CXL16/4/1
CXL16/4/1

SAP

Fiber Routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
(SLOT22) (SLOT24) (SLOT25) (SLOT23)

Figure 10-3 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack (before the division of slots)

S S
S S S S S S S S
L L
L L L L L L L L
O O S S S S
S S S S O O O O O O O O
T T L L L L
L L L L T T T T T T T T
9 10 O O O O
O O O O 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14
T T T T
T T T T
1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4
CXL16/4/1
CXL16/4/1

5 6 7 8
1.25Gbit/s
622Mbit/s
622Mbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s

2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s

SAP

Fiber Routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
SLOT22 SLOT24 SLOT25 SLOT23

Figure 10-4 shows the slot layout of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack after the division of slots.
Figure 10-5 shows the slot access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 after the division of slots.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
10 Planning Hardware Planning Guidelines

Figure 10-4 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack (after the division of slots)

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 19 20 21 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
interface board
interface board
interface board

processing board
processing board
interface board

processing board

processing board

interface board
interface board
interface board

interface board
S S S

CXL16/4/1
CXL16/4/1
L L L

SAP
O O O
T T T
5 6 7

Fiber Routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
(SLOT22) (SLOT24) (SLOT25) (SLOT23)

Figure 10-5 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack (after the division of slots)
S S S
L L L
O O O S S
T T T S S S S S
L L
19 20 21 L L L L L
O O S S S S
S S S S O O O O O
T T L L L L
L L L L T T T T T
9 10 O O O O
O O O O 8 11 12 13 14
T T T T
T T T T S S S
C C 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 L L L S
O O O X X 5 6 7 8
2.5Gbit/s

A
T T T L L
P
5 6 7 16 16
/4 /4/
/1 1
Fiber Routing
PIU FAN FAN PIU
SLOT22 SLOT24 SLOT25 SLOT23

Slot Area for Interface Boards


Slots for interface boards: slots 1–4 and 15–18

Slot Area for Processing Boards


l Slots for processing boards before the division of slots: slots 5–8 and 11–13
l Slots for processing boards after the division of slots: slots 5–8, 11–13, and 19–21
l Slots for integrated boards of the SCC, cross-connect and line units: slots 9–10
l Slot for the system auxiliary processing board: slot 14

10-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 10 Planning Hardware

Other slots
l SEI auxiliary interface board: slot area for auxiliary interface boards
l Slots for PIU boards: slots 22–33
l Slots for fan boards: slots 24–25

Mapping Relation Between Slots for Interface Boards and Slots for Processing
Boards
Table 10-3 lists the mapping relation between slots for interface boards and slots for processing
boards.

Table 10-3 Mapping relation between slots for interface boards and slots for processing boards
for the OptiX OSN 2500
Slots for Slots for Interface Slots for Slots for Interface
Processing Boards Boards Processing Boards Boards

Slot 6 Slots 1 and 2 Slot 7 Slots 3 and 4

Slot 12 Slots 15 and 16 Slot 13 Slots 17 and 18

Slot 6 (half-height Slot 2 Slot 20 (half-height Slot 1


slot) slot)

Slot 7 (half-height Slot 4 Slot 21 (half-height Slot 3


slot) slot)

Boards and Their Valid Slots


Table 10-4 lists the boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 2500.

Table 10-4 Boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 2500
Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1SL16A, N1SL16, 1 x STM-16 optical interface Slots 7–8 and 11–12


N2SL16A, N2SL16, board
N3SL16A, N3SL16

N1SF16 1 x STM-16 optical interface Slots 7–8 and 11–12


board (with FEC)

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
10 Planning Hardware Planning Guidelines

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1SLQ4, N2SLQ4 4 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 7–8 and 11–12 (for
the board housed in any of
slots 7–8 and 11–12, four
optical interfaces can be
configured), slots 5–6 (for
the board housed in any of
slots 5–6, one optical
interface can be
configured), and slot 13
(for the board housed in any
of slot 13, two optical
interfaces can be
configured)

N1SLD4, N2SLD4 2 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 7–8 and 11–13 (for
the board housed in any of
slots 7–8 and 11–13, two
optical interfaces can be
configured), and slots 5–6
(for the board housed in any
of slots 5–6, one optical
interface can be
configured)

N1SL4, N2SL4 1 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 5–8 and 11–13

N2SLO1 8 x AU-3 high density access Slots 5–6 (for the board
board housed in any of slots 5–6,
four optical interfaces can
be configured)
Slots 7–8 and 11–13 (for
the board housed in any of
slots 7–8 and 11–13, 1–8
optical interfaces can be
configured)

N1SLQ1, N2SLQ1 4 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 5–8 and 11–13

N1SL1, N2SL1 1 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 5–8 and 11–13

10-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 10 Planning Hardware

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1SLT1 12 x STM-1 optical interface Slots 5–6 (for the board


board housed in any of slots 5–6,
1–4 optical interfaces can
be configured), slots 7–8
and 11–12 (for the board
housed in any of slots 7–8
and 11–12, 1–12 optical
interfaces can be
configured), and slot 13
(for the board housed in any
of slot 13, 1–8 optical
interfaces can be
configured)

R1SL4 1 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 5–7 and 19–21


(half-height)

R1SLD4 2 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 7 and 21 (for the


(half-height) board housed in any of slots
7 and 21, two optical
interfaces can be
configured after the
division of slots), and slots
5–6 and 19–20 (for the
board housed in any of slots
5–6 and 19–20, one optical
interface can be configured
after the division of slots)

R1SLQ1 4 x STM-4 optical interface board Slots 5–7 and 19–21


(half-height)

R1SL1 1 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 5–7 and 19–21


(half-height)

N1SEP (interfaces 8 x STM-1 processing board Slots 6–7 and 12–13


available on the interface
board)a

N1SEP1 (interfaces 2 x STM-1 processing board Slots 5–8 and 11–13


available on the front
panel)a

N1SPQ4, N2SPQ4 4 x E4/STM-1 processing board Slots 6–7 and 12–13

N1PD3, N2PD3 6 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 6–7 and 12–13

N1PL3, N2PL3 3 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 6–7 and 12–13

N1PL3A, N2PL3A 3 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 5–8 and 11–13


(without the interface
board)

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
10 Planning Hardware Planning Guidelines

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1PQ1 (A/B) 63 x E1 75-ohm or 12-ohm Slots 5–7 and 12–13


processing board

N2PQ1 63 x E1/T1 hybrid processing Slots 5–7 and 12–13


board

N2PQ3 12 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 6–7 and 12–13

N1PQM 63 x E1/T1 processing board Slots 5–7 and 12–13

N1DXA DDN service convergence board Slots 5–8 and 11–13

N1DX1 DDN service access and Slots 5–7 and 12–13


convergence board

N1DM12 DDN service access board Slots 1–4 and 15–18

R1PD1A/B 32 x E1 processing board (half- Slots 5–7 and 19–21


height)

R2PD1 32 x E1/T1 processing board Slots 5–7 and 19–21

R1EFT4 4 x FE Ethernet transparent Slots 5–7 and 19–21


transmission board (half-height)

N1EFS4 4 x FE Ethernet processing board Slots 5–8 and 11–13 (622


with Lanswitch Mbit/s)

N2EFS4 4 x FE Ethernet processing board Slots 5–6 (622 Mbit/s), and


with Lanswitch slots 7–8, 11, and 13 (1.25
Gbit/s)

N1EFS0 (with the 8 x FE Ethernet processing board Slots 6–7 and 12–13 (622
interface board) with Lanswitch Mbit/s)

N2EFS0 (with the 8 x FE Ethernet processing board Slots 7, and 12–13 (1.25
interface board) with Lanswitch Gbit/s), and slot 6 (622
Mbit/s)

N4EFS0 8 x FE Ethernet processing board Slots 7, and 12–13 (1.25


with Lanswitch Gbit/s), and slot 6 (622
Mbit/s)

N1EGS2 2 x GE Ethernet processing board Slots 7–8 and 11–12 (2.5


with Lanswitch Gbit/s)

N2EGS2 2 x GE Ethernet processing board Slots 5–6 (622 Mbit/s),


with Lanswitch slots 7–8 and 11–12 (2.5
Gbit/s), and slot 13 (1.25
Gbit/s)

N1EGT2 2 x GE Ethernet transparent Slots 5–6 (622 Mbit/s),


transmission board slots 7–8 and 11–12 (2.5
Gbit/s), and slot 13 (1.25
Gbit/s)

10-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 10 Planning Hardware

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N2EGR2 2 x GE Ethernet ring processing Slots 5–6 (622 Mbit/s),


board slots 7–8, 11–12 (2.5 Gbit/
s), and slot 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

N1EFT8 (interfaces 16 x FE Ethernet transparent Slots 7 and 12–13 (1.25


available on the interface transmission board Gbit/s)
board)

N1EFT8 (interfaces 8 x FE Ethernet transparent Slots 5–8 and 11–13 (622


available on the front transmission board Mbit/s)
panel)

N1EFT8A 8 x FE Ethernet transparent Slots 5–8 and 11–13 (622


transmission board Mbit/s)

N1EMR0, N2EMR0 1 x GE and 12 x FE Ethernet ring Slot 6 (622 Mbit/s), slots 7


(interfaces available on the processing board and 12 (2.5 Gbit/s), and slot
interface board) 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

N1EMR0, N2EMR0 1 x GE and 4 x FE Ethernet ring Slots 5–6 (622 Mbit/s),


(interfaces available on the processing board slots 7–8 and 11–12 (2.5
front panel) Gbit/s), and slot 13 (1.25
Gbit/s)

N1EMS4 (interfaces 4 x GE and 16 x FE Ethernet Slot 6 (622 Mbit/s), slots 7


available on the interface transparent transmission and and 12 (2.5 Gbit/s), and slot
board) convergence board 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

N1EMS4 (interfaces 4 x GE Ethernet convergence Slots 5–6 (622 Mbit/s),


available on the front board slots 7–8 and 11–12 (2.5
panel) Gbit/s), and slot 13 (1.25
Gbit/s)

N1EGS4 4 x GE Ethernet convergence Slots 5–6 (622 Mbit/s),


board slots 7–8 and 11–12 (2.5
Gbit/s), and slot 13 (1.25
Gbit/s)

N3EGS4 4 x GE Ethernet convergence Slots 5–6 (622 Mbit/s),


board slots 7–8 and 11–12 (2.5
Gbit/s), and slot 13 (1.25
Gbit/s)

N1ADL4 1 x STM-4 ATM processing Slots 7–8 and 11–13 (1.25


board Gbit/s)

N1ADQ1 4 x STM-1 ATM processing Slots 7–8 and 11–13 (1.25


board Gbit/s)

N1IDQ1 4 x STM-1 ATM processing Slots 5–6 (622 Mbit/s), and


board slots 7–8, 11, and 13 (1.25
Gbit/s)

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
10 Planning Hardware Planning Guidelines

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1IDL4 1 x STM-4 ATM processing Slots 5–6 (622 Mbit/s), and


board slots 7–8, 11, and 13 (1.25
Gbit/s)

N1MST4 4-port multiservice transparent Slots 5–8 and 11–13


transmission board

N1MR2A 2-channel optical add/drop Slots 5–8 and 11–13


multiplexing board (processing
board)

N1MR2B 2-channel optical add/drop Slots 5–7 and 19–21


multiplexing board (half-height)

N1MR2C (with interface 2-channel optical add/drop Slots 1–4 and 15–18
board) multiplexing board

TN11MR2 2-channel optical add/drop Slots 5–8 and 11–13


multiplexing board

TN11MR4 4-channel optical add/drop Slots 5–8 and 11–13


multiplexing board

TN11CMR2 2-channel optical add/drop Slots 5–8 and 11–13


multiplexing board

TN11CMR4 4-channel optical add/drop Slots 5–8 and 11–13


multiplexing board

N1LWX Arbitrary bit rate wavelength Slots 5–8 and 11–13


conversion board

N1BA2 2-channel optical booster Slots 5–8 and 11–13


amplifier board

N1BPA 1-channel amplifier and 1- Slots 5–8 and 11–13


channel preamplifier board

TN11OBU1 Optical booster amplifier board Slots 5–8 and 11–13

N1EU08 8 x STM-1 (e) electrical interface Slots 3, 15, and 17


board

N1OU08 (LC) 8 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 3, 15, and 17

N2OU08 (SC) 8 x STM-1 optical interface board Slots 3, 15, and 17

N1EU04 4 x STM-1 (e) electrical interface Slots 1, 3, 15 and 17


board

N1MU04 4 x E4/STM-1 electrical interface Slots 1, 3, 15 and 17


switching board

N1C34S 3 x E3/T3 electrical interface Slots 1, 3, 15 and 17


switching board

10-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 10 Planning Hardware

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1D34S 6 x E3/T3 electrical interface Slots 1–4 and 15–18


switching board

N1D75S 32 x E1/T1 75-ohm electrical Slots 1–4 and 15–18


interface switching board

N1D12S 32 x E1/T1 120-ohm electrical Slots 1–4 and 15–18


interface switching board

N1D12B 32 x E1/T1 120-ohm electrical Slots 1–4 and 15–18


interface board

N1ETF8b 8 x 100M Ethernet twisted pair Slots 1–4 and 15–18


interface board

N1EFF8b 8 x 100M Ethernet optical Slots 1–4 and 15–18


interface board

N1ETS8 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted Slots 1, 3, 15, and 17


pair interface switching board

N1TSB8 8-channel electrical interface Slots 1, 2, 17, and 18


switching board

N1TSB4 4-channel electrical interface Slots 1 and 17


switching board

Q2CXL16c STM-16 integrated board of the Slots 9–10


cross-connect, timing and line
units

Q2CXL4c STM-4 integrated board of the Slots 9–10


SCC, cross-connect and line units

Q2CXL1c STM-1 integrated board of the Slots 9–10


SCC, cross-connect and line units

Q1SAP, Q2SAP System auxiliary processing unit Slot 14

Q1PIU PIU board Slots 22–23

Q1SEI Auxiliary signal expanding Slot area for SEI interfaces


interface board

N1FAN Fan board Slots 24–25

N1FIB Filter isolating board Slots 5–8 and 11–13

N1COA, 61COA, Case-shaped optical amplifier Slots 101–102


62COAd

CAUd Power monitoring board Slot 50

ROPd Single wavelength long-haul Slot 103


board

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
10 Planning Hardware Planning Guidelines

Board Full Name Valid Slots

a: On the T2000, the SEP is displayed as the SEP or SEP1. When interfaces are available on
the front panel of the SEP, the SEP is displayed as the SEP1 on the T2000. When the SEP is
used with the interface board, the SEP is displayed as the SEP on the T2000.
b: The EMS4 is used with the N1ETF8 and N1EFF8.
c: The CXL is an integrated board of the cross-connect, timing, SCC and line units for the
OptiX OSN 2500. As one physical board in the subrack, the CXL is housed in any of slots 9
and 10. On the T2000. the CXL is displayed as the CXL, SCC, and SL1/4/16, which are
housed in any of slots 80–81, 82–83, and 9–10 respectively.
d: The corresponding slots are logical slots rather than physical slots.

10.2.2 Planning Principles


The basic principles for planning the slots and the slots supported by the equipment are defined.

Adhere to the following principles when planning slots for different boards of the OptiX OSN
2500:

l The integrated board should be inserted in slot 9.


l The SAP board should be inserted in slot 14.
l If an MSP ring is configured, the two boards that are involved in the same ring should be
housed in paired slots.
l For configuration of the MSP or SNCP, if the working board is a line board that supports
the TCM service or AU-3 service, the protection board should also be a line board that
supports the TCM service or AU-3 service. Otherwise, services are interrupted in the case
of protection switching.
NOTE

When the TCM and AU-3 functions are enabled on the working board, the TCM and AU-3 functions
on the protection board are not required.
l When the E1/T1 boards are configured with the TPS protection, slot 5 is for the protection
board. For future expansion, reserve the slot and configure boards to the other slots.
l When the E3/T3/E4/STM-1 boards are configured with the TPS protection, slots 6 and 13
are for the protection boards. For future expansion, reserve the two slots and configure
boards to the other slots.
l Do not use different optical interfaces on the same board to form a network.

Follow the sequence listed in Table 10-5 to plan slots for boards.

Table 10-5 Sequence for planning slots for boards

Sequence Board Slots (Priority Decreases from


No. Left to Right)

1 N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16, Slots 8/11, 7/12


N1SL6A, N2SL6A, N3SL6A,
N1SF16

10-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 10 Planning Hardware

Sequence Board Slots (Priority Decreases from


No. Left to Right)

2 N1SLQ4, N2SLQ4

3 N1SLT1, N2SLO1 Slots 8/11, 7/12, 13, 6, 5

4 N1SLD4, N2SLD4 Slots 8/11, 7/12, 13

5 R1PD1, R2PD1, R1SLQ1, R1SL1 Slots 5, 19, 6, 20, 7, 21 (half height)

6 N1PQ1, N1PQM, N2PQ1 Slots 7, 12, 6, 13 (uplink cable


routing)
Slots 6, 13, 7, 12 (downlink cable
routing)

7 N1PD3, N2PD3, N1PL3, N2PL3 Slots 7, 12, 6, 13

8 N1DX1

9 N1DXA Slots 8/11, 7/12, 6/13, 5

10 N2EFS0, N4EFS0 Slots 7, 12, 6, 13

11 N1EMR0, N2EMR0 Slots 7/12, 6/13 (with the interface


board)
12 N1EMS4
Slots 8/11, 7/12, 6/13, 5 (without the
13 N1EFT8 interface board)

14 N1EFT8A Slots 8/11, 7/12, 6/13, 5

15 R1EFT4 Slots 5, 19, 6, 20, 7, 21 (half height)

16 N1SEP1 Slots 7/12, 6/13 (with the interface


board)
Slots 8/11, 7/12, 6/13, 5 (without the
interface board)

17 N1SL4, N2SL4, N1SLQ1, N2SLQ1, Slots 8/11, 7/12, 6/13, 5


N1SL1, N2SL1

18 N1EFS4, N2EFS4

19 N1EGS4, N3EGS4, N2EGS2

20 N1EGT2

21 N1MST4

22 N1PL3A, N2PL3A

23 N1ADQ1, N1ADL4, N1IDQ1,


N1IDL4

24 N1BA2, N1BPA

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10-15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
10 Planning Hardware Planning Guidelines

Sequence Board Slots (Priority Decreases from


No. Left to Right)

25 N1LWX, N1MR2A, TN11MR2,


TN11MR4, TN11CMR2,
TN11CMR4, TN11OBU1

10.3 Planning Interface Boards


The interfaces for each board and the principles for planning the interfaces are defined.
10.3.1 Planning Interface Boards
Interfaces supported by the equipment are interfaces of the SDH processing boards, PDH
processing boards, and data processing boards.
10.3.2 Planning Principles
The equipment supports optical interfaces at multiple rates. When planning the optical interfaces,
follow the corresponding principles.

10.3.1 Planning Interface Boards


Interfaces supported by the equipment are interfaces of the SDH processing boards, PDH
processing boards, and data processing boards.

Interfaces of SDH Processing Boards


Table 10-6 lists the interfaces of the SDH processing boards of the OptiX OSN 2500.

Table 10-6 Interfaces of SDH processing boards

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connect


or

N1SL16, Interfaces available L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je LC


N2SL16, on the front panel
N3SL16

N1SL16A, Interfaces available I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2 LC


N2SL16A, on the front panel
N3SL16A

N1SF16 Interfaces available Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f LC


on the front panel

N1SLQ4 Interfaces available I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC


on the front panel

N2SLQ4 Interfaces available I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC


on the front panel

N1SLD4 Interfaces available I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC


on the front panel

10-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 10 Planning Hardware

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connect


or

N2SLD4 Interfaces available I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC


on the front panel

N1SL4 Interfaces available I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC


on the front panel

N2SL4 Interfaces available I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC


on the front panel

N1SLT1 Interfaces available S-1.1 LC


on the front panel

N1SLQ1 Interfaces available I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC


on the front panel

N2SLQ1 Interfaces available I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC


on the front panel

N1SL1 Interfaces available I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC


on the front panel

N2SL1 Interfaces available I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC


on the front panel

R1SLD4 Interfaces available I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC


on the front panel

R1SL4 Interfaces available I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC


on the front panel

R1SLQ1 Interfaces available I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC


on the front panel

R1SL1 Interfaces available I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC


on the front panel

N1SEP1a Interfaces available 75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical interface SMB


on the front panel

N1SEPb 4 x STM-1 line 75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface SMB


processing board:
N1EU04

8 x STM-1 line I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1 LC


processing board:
N1OU08

8 x STM-1 line I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1 SC


processing board:
N2OU08

8 x STM-1 line 75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface SMB


processing board:
N1EU08

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10-17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
10 Planning Hardware Planning Guidelines

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connect


or

N2SLO1 Interfaces available I-1.1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC


on the front panel

Q2CXL16c Interfaces available I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2, Ve-16.2 LC


on the front panel

Q2CXL4c Interfaces available I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC


on the front panel

Q2CXL1c Interfaces available I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC


on the front panel

a: The N1SEP1 and N1SEP are the boards of the same type. When they are used with the
interface board, they are displayed as "N1SEP" on the T2000. When they provide interfaces
on the front panel, they are displayed as "N1SEP1" on the T2000.
b: The N1SEP can be used with the N1TSB8 or the N1TSB4 board to realize the TPS
protection.
c: The Q2CXL is a board that integrates the line, SCC, cross-connect, and timing units for
the OptiX OSN 2500. It is housed in slot 9 and slot 10. On the T2000, it is displayed as three
board types: CXL, SCC and SL1/4/16, respectively seated in the logical slots 80–81, 82–83
and 9–10.

Interfaces of PDH Processing Boards


Table 10-7 lists the interfaces of the PDH processing boards of the OptiX OSN 2500.

Table 10-7 Interfaces of PDH processing boards

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connect


or

N1SPQ4 Interfaces available on 75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical interface SMB


the interface board, used
with N1MU04

N2SPQ4 Interfaces available on 75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical interface SMB


the interface board, used
with N1MU04

N1PD3 Interfaces available on 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface SMB


the interface board, used
with N1D34S

N1PL3 Interfaces available on 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface SMB


the interface board, used
with N1C34S

N1PL3A Interfaces available on 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface75- SMB


the front panel ohm E3/T3 electrical interface

10-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 10 Planning Hardware

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connect


or

N2PQ3 Interfaces available on 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface SMB


the interface board, used
with N1D34S

N2PD3 Interfaces available on 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface SMB


the interface board, used
with N1D34S

N2PL3 Interfaces available on 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface SMB


the interface board, used
with N1C34S

N2PL3A Interfaces available on 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface SMB


the front panel

N1PQ1A Interfaces available on 75-ohm E1 interface DB44


the interface board, used
with N1D75S

N1PQ1B Interfaces available on 120-ohm E1 interface DB44


the interface board, used
with N1D12B

N1PQM Interfaces available on 120-ohm E1 interface, 100-ohm T1 DB44


the interface board, used interface
with N1D12S

N2PQ1A Interfaces available on 75-ohm E1 interface DB44


the interface board, used
with N1D75S

N2PQ1B Interfaces available on 120-ohm E1 interface, 100-ohm T1 DB44


the interface board, used interface
with N1D12S

R1PD1A Interfaces available on 75-ohm E1 interface DB44


the interface board, used
with N1D75S

R1PD1B Interfaces available on 120-ohm E1 interface DB44


the interface board, used
with N1D12S

R2PD1A Interfaces available on 75-ohm E1 interface DB44


the interface board, used
with N1D75S

R2PD1B Interfaces available on 120-ohm E1 interface, 100-ohm T1 DB44


the interface board, used interface
with N1D12S

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10-19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
10 Planning Hardware Planning Guidelines

Interfaces of Data Processing Boards


Table 10-8 lists the interfaces of the data processing boards of the OptiX OSN 2500.

Table 10-8 Interfaces of data processing boards


Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Conne
ctor

N1EGS2 Interfaces available on the 1000Base-SX/LX/ZX LC


front panel

N2EGS2 Interfaces available on the 1000Base-SX/LX/ZX LC


front panel

N1EFS0 Interfaces available on the 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45


interface board, used with
N1ETF8

Interfaces available on the 100BASE-FX LC


interface board, used with
N1EFF8

N2EFS0 Interfaces available on the 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45


interface board, used with
N1ETF8

Interfaces available on the 100BASE-FX LC


interface board, used with
N1EFF8

N4EFS0 Interfaces available on the 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45


interface board, used with
N1ETF8

Interfaces available on the 100BASE-FX LC


interface board, used with
N1EFF8

N1EFS4 Interfaces available on the 10/100Base-TX RJ-45


front panel

N2EFS4 Interfaces available on the 10/100Base-TX RJ-45


front panel

N1EGT2 Interfaces available on the 1000Base-SX/LX/ZX LC


front panel

N1EFT8 Interfaces available on the 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45


front panel

Interfaces available on the 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45


interface board, used with
N1ETF8

10-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 10 Planning Hardware

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Conne


ctor

Interfaces available on the 100BASE-FX LC


interface board, used with
N1EFF8

N1EFT8 Interfaces available on the 10/100Base-TX RJ-45


A front panel

R1EFT4 Interfaces available on the 10/100Base-TX RJ-45


front panel

N1EMS4 Interfaces available on the 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC


front panel

Interfaces available on the 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45


interface board, used with
N1ETF8

Interfaces available on the 100BASE-FX LC


interface board, used with
N1EFF8

N1EGS4, Interfaces available on the 1000Base-SX/LX/ ZX LC


N3EGS4 front panel

N2EMR0 Interfaces available on the 10/100BASE-TX RJ-45


interface board, used with
N1ETF8

Interfaces available on the 100BASE-FX LC


interface board, used with
N1EFF8

Interfaces available on the 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX LC


front panel

N2EGR2 Interfaces available on the 1000Base-SX/LX/ZX LC


front panel

N1ADL4 Interfaces available on the S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC


front panel

N1ADQ1 Interfaces available on the Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC


front panel

N1IDL4 Interfaces available on the S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC


front panel

N1IDQ1 Interfaces available on the Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC


front panel

N1MST4 Interfaces available on the - LC


front panel

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10-21


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
10 Planning Hardware Planning Guidelines

Interfaces of DDN Processing Boards


Table 10-9 lists the interfaces of DDN processing boards of the OptiX OSN 2500.

Table 10-9 Interfaces of DDN processing boards


Board Full Name Interfacing Interfacing Mode Connector
Mode

N1DX1 N x 64 kbit/s Interfaces RS232, RS449, EIA530, DB28, DB44


service available on EIA530-A, V.35, V.24,
access and the N x 64 kbit/ X.21, Frame E1
convergence s interface
board board,
N1DM12

N1DXA N x 64 kbit/s - - -
service
convergence
board

Interfaces of WDM Processing Boards


Table 10-10 lists the interfaces of WDM processing boards.

Table 10-10 Interfaces of WDM processing boards


Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type

N1MR2A Interfaces available on the LC


interface board

N1MR2C Interfaces available on the LC


interface board

N1LWX Interfaces available on the LC


interface board

TN11MR2 Interfaces available on the LC


interface board

TN11MR4 Interfaces available on the LC


interface board

TN11CMR2 Interfaces available on the LC


interface board

TN11CMR4 Interfaces available on the LC


interface board

10-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 10 Planning Hardware

Interfaces of Optical Power Booster Amplifier and Dispersion Compensation Units


Table 10-11 lists the interfaces of the optical power booster amplifier and dispersion
compensation units.

Table 10-11 Interfaces of the optical power booster amplifier and dispersion compensation units

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type

BA2 Interfaces available on the LC


interface board

BPA Interfaces available on the LC


interface board

61COA Interfaces available on the SC


interface board

N1COA Interfaces available on the SC


interface board

62COA Interfaces available on the SC, E2000


interface board

DCU Interfaces available on the LC


interface board

ROP Interfaces available on the LC


interface board

N1FIB Interfaces available on the LC, E2000


interface board

TN11OBU1 Interfaces available on the LC


interface board

Interfaces of Auxiliary Boards


Table 10-12 lists the interfaces of auxiliary boards.

Table 10-12 Interfaces of auxiliary boards

Board Full Name Interface Type

Q1PIU Power interface unit -

N1FAN Fan control board -

SEI Auxiliary signal extension RJ-45


interface board

Q1SAP System auxiliary processing unit RJ-45

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10-23


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
10 Planning Hardware Planning Guidelines

10.3.2 Planning Principles


The equipment supports optical interfaces at multiple rates. When planning the optical interfaces,
follow the corresponding principles.
Determine the interfaces for the OptiX OSN 2500 to connect other equipment according to the
interface type and connector type.
For details on the technical specifications of the interfaces, refer to Chapter 11 "Technical
Specifications" in the OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product
Description.

Principles for Planning STM-16 Optical Interfaces


Adhere to the principles listed in Table 10-13 when planning STM-16 optical interfaces.

Table 10-13 Principles for planning STM-16 optical interfaces


Interface Connect Transmissio Principles
Type or n Distance
(km)

I-16 LC 0 to 2 The interface supports the short-distance


networking and requires a 5 dB attenuator.

S-16.1 LC 2 to 25 The interface supports the short-distance


networking. If the required transmission
distance ranges from 2 km to 15 km, a 5 dB
optical attenuator is required.

L-16.1 LC 25 to 50 The interface supports the long-distance


networking. If the required transmission
distance ranges from 25 km to 35 km, a 5 dB
optical attenuator is required.

L-16.2 LC 50 to 80 The interface supports the long-distance


networking. If the required transmission
distance ranges from 50 km to 60 km, a 5 dB
optical attenuator is required.

L-16.2Je LC 80 to 105 The interface supports the long-distance


transmission.

V-16.2Je LC 105 to 145 The interface supports the ultra-distance


networking.
l One BA2 (17 dBm) is required if the
transmission distance ranges from 129.1 km
to 145 km.
l One BA2 (14 dBm) is required if the
transmission distance ranges from 105 km to
129.1 km.

10-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 10 Planning Hardware

Interface Connect Transmissio Principles


Type or n Distance
(km)

U-16.2Je LC 145 to 200 The interface supports the ultra-distance


networking.If the G.652 fiber is used, the
following configuration is required for different
transmission distance:
l If the required transmission distance ranges
from 145 km to 163 km, use one BPA (14
dBm), two tunable attenuators and one LC/
LC flange.
l If the required transmission distance ranges
from 163 km to 174 km, use one BPA (17
dBm), two tunable attenuators and one LC/
LC flange.
l If the required transmission distance ranges
from 192 km to 200 km, use one BPA (17
dBm), one Roman 62COA, two tunable
attenuators and one LC/LC flange.

U-16.2c LC 174 to 181 When the G.652 fiber is used, use one BPA (14
dBm), one FEC, two tunable attenuators and one
LC/LC flange.

U-16.2d LC 181 to 192 When the G.652 fiber is used, use one BPA (17
dBm), one FEC, two tunable attenuators and one
LC/LC flange.

U-16.2f LC 192 to 210 When the G.652 fiber is used, use one BPA (17
dBm), one FEC, two tunable attenuators, one
Roman 62COA and one LC/LC flange.

Principles for Planning STM-4 Optical Interfaces


Adhere to the principles listed in Table 10-14 when planning STM-4 optical interfaces.

Table 10-14 Principles for Planning STM-4 Optical Interfaces

Interface Connect Transmissio Principles


Type or n Distance
(km)

I-4 LC 0 to 2 The interface supports the short-distance


networking and requires a 5 dB attenuator.

S-4.1 LC 2 to 20 If the required transmission distance ranges


from 2 km to 15 km, use a 5 dB attenuator.

L-4.1 LC 20 to 50 If the required transmission distance ranges


from 20 km to 40 km, use a 5 dB attenuator.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10-25


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
10 Planning Hardware Planning Guidelines

Interface Connect Transmissio Principles


Type or n Distance
(km)

L-4.2 LC 50 to 80 The interface supports long-distance


networking and requires a 5 dB attenuator if the
transmission distance ranges from 50 km to 60
km.

Ve-4.2 LC 80 to 100 The interface supports the ultra-distance


networking.

Principles for Planning STM-1 Optical Interfaces


Adhere to the principles listed in Table 10-15 when planning STM-1 optical interfaces.

Table 10-15 Principles for Planning STM-1 Optical Interfaces


Interface Connect Transmissio Principles
Type or n Distance
(km)

I-1 LC 0 to 2 The interface supports the short-distance


networking and requires a 5 dB attenuator.

S-1.1 LC 2 to 20 The interface supports the short-distance


networking. If the required transmission
distance ranges from 2 km to 15 km, a 5 dB
optical attenuator is required.

L-1.1 LC 20 to 60 The interface supports medium-distance


networking. If the transmission distance ranges
from 20 km to 40 km, a 5 dB optical attenuator
is required.

L-1.2 LC 60 to 80 The interface supports long-distance


networking. If the transmission distance ranges
from 60 km to 80 km, a 5 dB optical attenuator
is required.

Ve-1.2 LC 80 to 100 The interface supports the ultra-distance


transmission.

10-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 11 Planning Environment for Operation

11 Planning Environment for Operation

About This Chapter

The power consumption of the equipment, environment for operation, and planning principles
are defined.

11.1 Power Consumption of the Equipment


The power consumption of the equipment should be considered when planning the operating
environment for the equipment.
11.2 Environment for Operation
The OptiX OSN 2500 requires proper climate for operating.
11.3 Planning Principles
When planning the environment for the equipment, follow the basic principles.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
11 Planning Environment for Operation Planning Guidelines

11.1 Power Consumption of the Equipment


The power consumption of the equipment should be considered when planning the operating
environment for the equipment.

Table 11-1 lists the power supply parameters of the OptiX OSN 2500.

Table 11-1 Power supply specifications

Item Specification

Power supply mode DC power supply

Nominal voltage –48 V or –60 V

Voltage range –38.4 V to –57.6 V or –48 V to –72 V

Max. power consumption 400 W/643 Wa

Max. current 10 A/16.8 Ab

a: This value indicates the maximum power consumption for the enhanced subrack.
b: This value indicates the maximum current for the enhanced subrack.

For details on the power consumption of each board, refer to the OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent
Optical Transmission System Product Description.

11.2 Environment for Operation


The OptiX OSN 2500 requires proper climate for operating.

Climate
Table 11-2 and Table 11-3 list the climate requirements for operation of the OptiX OSN
2500.

Table 11-2 Requirements for temperature and humidity

Temperature Relative Humidity

Long-term Short-term operation Long-term Short-term operation


operation operation

0℃ to 45℃ –5℃ to 55℃ 10% to 90% 5% to 95%


NOTE
The temperature and humidity values are tested in the place 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4 m in front of
the equipment. Short-term operation means that the consecutive working time of the equipment does not
exceed 96 hours, and the accumulated working time every year does not exceed 15 days.

11-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 11 Planning Environment for Operation

Table 11-3 Other climate requirements

Item Range

Altitude ≤ 4000 m

Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Temperature change rate ≤ 30℃/h

Solar radiation ≤ 700 W/s2

Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s2

Air flowing speed ≤ 5 m/s

Biological Environment
l Avoid multiplication of microbe, such as eumycete and mycete.
l Keep rodents such as mice away.

Air Cleanness
l The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive
dust.
l The density of the mechanical active substances complies with the requirements defined
by Table 11-4.

Table 11-4 Requirements for the density of the mechanical active substance

Mechanical Active Content


Substance

Dust particle ≤ 3 x 105 particles/m3

Suspending dust ≤ 0.2 mg/m3

Precipitable dust ≤ 1.5 mg/m2·h

Gravel ≤ 20 mg/m3

l The density of the chemical active substances complies with the requirements defined by
Table 11-5.

Table 11-5 Density requirements for chemical active substances during operation

Chemical Active Substance Content

SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3

H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m3

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
11 Planning Environment for Operation Planning Guidelines

Chemical Active Substance Content

NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3

Cl2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3

HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3

HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3

O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3

NOX ≤ 0.50 mg/m3

Mechanical Stress
Table 11-6 lists the requirements of mechanical stress for operation.

Table 11-6 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation

Item Sub-Item Range

Sinusoidal Velocity ≤ 5 mm/s -


vibration
Acceleration - ≤ 2 m/s2

Frequency range 5 Hz to 62 Hz 62 Hz to 200 Hz

Impact Impact response Half-sin wave, 30 m/s2, 11 ms, three times on


spectrum II each surface

Static load 0 kPa


NOTE
Impact response spectrum is the maximum acceleration response curve generated by equipment that is
spurred by a specified impact. Static load is the pressure from upside, which the equipment with package
can endure when the equipment is piled up in a specific manner.

11.3 Planning Principles


When planning the environment for the equipment, follow the basic principles.

Proper environment is required for the OptiX OSN 2500 to operate safely. Consider the following
items when planning the operating environment for the OptiX OSN 2500.

l Location of the equipment room


l Architecture of the equipment room
l Cleanness of the equipment room
l Humidity and temperature requirements for the equipment
l ESD protection

11-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 11 Planning Environment for Operation

l Lightning protection grounding


l Power supply of the equipment
l Fire-fighting measures

For details, refer to Appendix A "Environment Requirements for Operation of the Equipment"
in the OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Installation Guide.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 12 Overview of Network Optimization

12 Overview of Network Optimization

About This Chapter

As the scale of a network increases, more services are provides and the network becomes more
complex. As a result, the network should be optimized according to specific principles.
12.1 Purpose of Network Optimization
The network optimization can improve the usage of network resources, safety, and stability of
the network, and increase the efficiency in network maintenance.
12.2 Principles for Optimizing the Network
When optimizing the network, follow the basic principles.
12.3 Process for Optimizing a Network
The process for optimizing a network includes preparing the optimization, evaluating the
network, providing and analyzing network optimization schemes, and performing the network
optimization.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
12 Overview of Network Optimization Planning Guidelines

12.1 Purpose of Network Optimization


The network optimization can improve the usage of network resources, safety, and stability of
the network, and increase the efficiency in network maintenance.
As the scale of a network increases, more services are provided and the network becomes more
complex. As a result, the engineering construction and network maintenance become more
difficult. In addition, more faults occur in the network. Hence, it is necessary to optimize such
a network. The purposes for optimizing the network are as follows:
l Improve the usage of network resources.
l Improve the safety and stability of the network.
l Increase the efficiency in network maintenance.

12.2 Principles for Optimizing the Network


When optimizing the network, follow the basic principles.
Adhere to the following principles when optimizing the network:
l Fully use the investment in network to be optimized.
l Analyze the existing network and conclude the service trend.
l Apply a measurable optimization scheme.
l Apply proper measures to ensure that the network optimization can be performed.

12.3 Process for Optimizing a Network


The process for optimizing a network includes preparing the optimization, evaluating the
network, providing and analyzing network optimization schemes, and performing the network
optimization.

Prepare for the Optimization


Make the following preparations before optimizing the network:
l Confirm the requirements for network optimization.
l Plan the scope, objects and date for network optimization.
l Determine the personnel responsible for optimizing the network.
l Collect documents about the network and analyze the network running condition.
l Prepare the tools for network optimization.

Evaluate the Network


The following operations should be performed to evaluate the network.
l Determine the purposes, objects, scope and date for network optimization.
l Determine the methods for evaluating the network optimization schemes.

12-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines 12 Overview of Network Optimization

l Collect in-field data and perform tests on site.


l Analyze the data, give marks and find the problem.
l Issue evaluation results and give optimization suggestions.

Provide and Analyze Network Optimization Schemes


The following operations should be done to provide and analyze network optimization schemes.
l Determine the nodes and objects for optimization.
l Provide schemes for optimizing different items as follows:
– Operation environment
– Networking − Service optimization
– Network self-healing and protection
– Network clock
– Optical network spare parts
– Network security management
– Network ECC communication
– Other network optimization suggestions
l Provide an overall analysis of the network optimization and an overall network optimization
scheme.
l Provide verifications and tests for the overall scheme.
l Conclude and determine a network optimization scheme.
l Purchase devices, materials and related service items.
l Confirm the delivered devices and materials.

Perform the Network Optimization


The following operations should be done to perform the network optimization.
l Determine a scheme for performing the network optimization.
l Determine the personnel responsible for performing the optimization, and the tools,
vehicles, spare parts and emergency schemes.
l Perform the network optimization.
l Check and verify the network optimization.
l Make the network optimization process and results known to the people concerned.
l Conclude the optimization for each item and trace the optimization.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines A Glossary

A Glossary

Numerics

1+1 protection A 1+1 protection architecture has one normal traffic signal, one working
SNC/trail, one protection SNC/trail and a permanent bridge.

1:N protection A 1:N protection architecture has N normal traffic signals, N working
SNCs/trails and one protection SNC/trail. It may have one extra traffic
signal.

100BASE-T Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area
network.

10BASE-T Physical Layer specification for a 10 Mb/s CSMA/CD local area


networkover two pairs of twisted-pair telephone wire.

ADM Add/Drop Multiplexing. Network elements that provide access to all, or


some subset of the constituent signals contained within an STM-N signal.
The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/or dropped from
(extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM.

APS Automatic Protection Switching. SDH switching mechanism that routes


traffic from working paths to protect paths in case a line board failure or
fibre cut occurs.

Asynchronous Protocol operation in which more than one exchange between a given
pair of entities can be handled simultaneously.

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode. A transfer mode in which the information


is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence
of cells containing information from an individual user is not necessarily
periodic. It is a protocol within the OSI layer 1. An ATM cell consists of
a 5 octet header followed by 48 octets of data.

Attenuation The attenuation is the rate of decrease of average optical power with
respect to distance along the fibre and is defined by the equation:

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
A Glossary Planning Guidelines

BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply. A building timing supply that


minimizes the number of synchronization links entering an office.
Sometimes referred to as a synchronization supply unit.

Broadcast The act of sending a frame addressed to all stations on the network

Build-in WDM A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into the OSN
series products. That is, the OSN products can add and drop several
wavelengths directly.

CAR Committed Access Rate. The CAR limits the input or output transmission
rate on an interface.

CBR Constant Bit Rate. The Constant Bit Rate service category is used by
connections that request a static amount of bandwidth that is continuously
available during the connection lifetime. This amount of bandwidth is
characterized by a peak cell Rate (PCR) value.

CDVT Cell Delay Variation Tolerance. Information sent in the forward and
backward direction to determine the upper bound of the tolerance
admitted for the time interval between cells pertaining to a given cell
flow. The backward CDVT values included in the IAM and MOD shall
be interpreted as maximum acceptable values for the cell flow in the
backward direction.

Convergence A service that provides enhancements to an underlying service in order


service to provide for the specific requirements of the convergence service user.

ECC Embedded Control Channel. An ECC provides a logical operations


channel between SDH NEs, utilizing a data communications channel
(DCC) as its physical layer.

Encapsulation In 1000BASE-X, the process by which a MAC packet is enclosed within


a PCS code-group stream

EPL Ethernet Private Line. An EPL service is a point-to-point interconnection


between two UNIs without SDH bandwidth sharing. Transport
bandwidth is never shared between different customers.

EPLn Ethernet Private LAN. A EPLn service is both a LAN service and a
private service. Transport bandwidth is never shared between different
customers.

EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line. A EVPL service is a service that is both a
line service and a virtual private service.

EVPLn Ethernet Virtual Private Local Area Network. A EVPLn service is a


service that is both a LAN service and a virtual private service.

ESCON Enterprise System Connection. A path protocol which connects the host
with various control units in an storage system. It is a serial bit stream
transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s.

A-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines A Glossary

Ethernet A data link level protocol comprising the OSI model's bottom two layers.
It is a broadcast networking technology that can use several different
physical media, including twisted pair cable and coaxial cable. Ethernet
usually uses CSMA/CD. TCP/IP is commonly used with Ethernet
networks.

FICON Fibre Connect. A new generation connection protocol which connects the
host with various control units. It carries single byte command protocol
through the physical path of fibre channel, and provides higher rate and
better performance than ESCON.

Frame A cyclic set of consecutive time slots in which the relative position of
each time slot can be identified.

Gateway NE Gateway Network Element. Gateway NE provides the communications


between NEs and network management system.

IP address A 32-bit identifier that is unique to each network device.

IP over DCC The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards and
controls the remote NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means
that the IP over DCC uses overhead DCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for
communication.

Input jitter For STS-N electrical interfaces input jitter tolerance is the maximum
tolerance amplitude of sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter frequency, which when
modulating the signal at an equipment input port, results in no more than
two errored seconds cumulative, where these errored seconds are
integrated over successive 30 second measurement intervals.

LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme. A solution features flexible


bandwidth and dynamic adjustment. In addition, it provides a failure
tolerance mechanism, which enhances the viability of virtual
concatenations and enables the dynamic adjustment to bandwidth (non-
service affecting).

MAC Media Access Control. The data link sublayer that is responsible for
transferring data to and from the Physical Layer.

Multicast Transmission of a frame to stations specified by a group address.

Mean launched The mean launched power at reference point S is the average power of a
power pseudo-random data sequence coupled into the fibre by the transmitter.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
A Glossary Planning Guidelines

MPLS Multiprotocol Label Switching. Multi-protocol label switching. It is a


standard routing and switching technology platform, capable of
supporting various high level protocols and services. The data
transmission over an MPLS network is independent of route calculating.
MPLS, as a connection-oriented transmission technology, guarantees
QoS effectively, supports various network level technologies, and is
independent of the link layer.

MSP Multiplex Section Protection. The MSP function provides capability for
switching a signal from a working to a protection section.

MSTP Multi-service transmission platform. It is based on the SDH platform,


capable of accessing, processing and transmitting TDM services, ATM
services, and Ethernet services, and providing unified management of
these services.

NE Network Element. A stand-alone physical entity that supports at least


network element functions and may also support operations system
function or mediation functions. It contains managed objects, a message
communication function and a management applications function.

Orderwire It establishes the voice communication among the operators and


maintenance engineers work in each working station.

Paired slots Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus
on the backplane. When the SCC unit is faulty or offline, the overheads
can be passed through between the paired slots by using the directly
connected overhead bus. When two SDH boards form an MSP ring, the
boards need to be inserted in paired slots so that the K bytes can be passed
through.

PCR Peak Cell Rate. An upper limit on the rate at which cells can be submitted
on an ATM connection.

Protection subnet In the T2000, the protection subnet becomes a concept of network level
other than multiplex section rings or path protection rings. The protection
sub-network involves NEs and fibre cable connections.

PVC Permanent Virtual Connection. Traditional ATM Permanent Virtual


Connection that is established/released upon a request initiated by a
management request procedure (that is all nodes supporting the
connections need to be instructed by the network management).

QoS Quality of Service. Information sent in the forward direction to indicate


the Quality of Service class requested by the user for a connection. QOS
classes are defined to allow a network to optimize resources in supporting
various service classes.

A-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines A Glossary

Receiver Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of


sensitivity average received power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-10 BER.

Reference clock A clock of very high stability and accuracy that may be completely
autonomous and whose frequency serves as a basis of comparison for the
frequency of other clocks.

REG A device that performs regeneration.

RPR Resilient Packet Ring. A metropolitan area network (MAN) technology


supporting data transfer among stations interconnected in a dual-ring
configuration.

SAN Storage Area Network. A dedicated high-speed data storage network


which interconnects multiple independent storage systems with multiple
servers through fibre path switch or other switch equipment.

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. A hierarchical set of digital transport


structures, standardized for the transport of suitably adapted payloads
over physical transmission networks.

SNCP Subnet Connection Protection. A working subnetwork connection is


replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if the working
subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required
level.

SSM Synchronization Status Message. ITU-T defines S1 byte to transmit the


network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of
the multiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of
synchronization quality grades.

TPS Tributary Protection Switching. A function provided by the equipment,


is intended to protect N tributary processing boards through a standby
tributary processing board.

VCC Virtual Channel Connection. That is a VC connection between two nodes.

VLAN Virtual local area network. A subset of the active topology of a Bridged
Local Area Network. Associated with each VLAN is a VLANIdentifier
(VID).

VPN Virtual Private Network. Enables IP service to be transmitted securely


over a public TCP/IP network by encrypting all service from one network
to another.

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines B Acronyms and Abbreviations

B Acronyms and Abbreviations

ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer

AIS Alarm Indication Signal

APS Automatic Protection Switching

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode

BA Booster Amplifier

BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply

BSS Base Station Subsystem

BWS Backbone WDM System

CAR Committed Access Rate

CBR Constant Bit Rate

CC Continuity Check

COA Case-Shape Optical Amplifier

CoS Class of Service

DCC Data Communication Channel

DCN Data Communication Network

DCU Dispersion Compensation Unit

DDN Digital Data Network

DNI Dual Node Interconnection

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
B Acronyms and Abbreviations Planning Guidelines

DSLAM Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer

DVB-ASI Digital Video Broadcast-Asynchronous Serial Interface

DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing

ECC Embedded Control Channel

EMS Element Management System

EPL Ethernet Private Line

EPLAN Ethernet Private LAN

ES End System

ESCON Enterprise Systems Connection

ESD Electrostatic Discharge

ES-IS End System-Intermedia System

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line

EVPLAN Ethernet Virtual Private LAN

FC Fiber Channel

FE Fast Ethernet

FEC Forward Error Correction

FICON Fiber Connection

FTP File Transfer Protocol

GE Gigabit Ethernet

GFP Generic Framing Procedure

HDLC High Level Data Link Control

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IETF Internet Engineering Task Force

IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol

IMA Inverse Multiplexing for ATM

B-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines B Acronyms and Abbreviations

IP Internet Protocol

IS-IS Intermedia System-Intermedia System

ITU-T International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication


Standardization Sector

LAN Local Area Network

LAPD Link Access Procedure on the D Channel

LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH

LB Loopback

LC Lucent Connector

LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme

LSP Label Switch Path

MADM Multiple Add/Drop Multiplexer

MPLS Multiprotocol Label Switching

MSP Multiplex Section Protection

MSTP Multiservice Transport Platform

NE Network Element

nrt-VBR Non-Real Time Variable Bit Rate

NSAP Network Service Access Point

OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer

OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance

OCS Optical Core Switching

OSI Open Systems Interconnection

OSN Optical Switch Node

OSPF Open Shortest Path First

OTU Optical Transponder Unit

PA Pre-Amplifier

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
B Acronyms and Abbreviations Planning Guidelines

PC Personal Computer

PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

POS Packet over SDH

PRBS Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence

QoS Quality of Service

RDI Remote Defect Indication

RNC Radio Network Controller

ROP Remote Optical Pumping

RPR Resilient Packet Ring

RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

rt-VBR Real Time Variable Bit Rate

SAN Storage Area Network

SC Square Connector

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SFP Small Form-Factor Pluggable

SNCP Subnetwork Connection Protection

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

SSM Synchronization Status Message

STM Synchronous Transfer Mode

TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

TM Terminal Multiplexer

TPS Tributary Protection Switching

UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter

UBR Unspecified Bit Rate

VB Virtual Bridge

B-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 05 (2009-09-15)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Planning Guidelines B Acronyms and Abbreviations

VC Virtual Container

VCI Virtual Channel Identifier

VLAN Virtual LAN

VP Virtual Path

VPI Virtual Path Identifier

VPN Virtual Private Network

WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing

Issue 05 (2009-09-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential B-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.